Trusted Business
Verified & Licensed
Virus Free Files
100% Safe Downloads
Secure Payment
SSL Protected
Instant Delivery
Available Immediately
2005 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
$37.95
2005 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
Instant PDF Download
Available immediately
Save to Your Device
Download & keep forever
Antivirus Scanned
100% virus-free
Trusted Worldwide
175,000+ customers
Description
2005 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
FILE DETAILS:
2005 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
Language : English
Pages : 4793
Downloadable : Yes
File Type : PDF
IMAGES PREVIEW OF THE MANUAL:
DESCRIPTION:
2005 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
FOREWORD:
- This manual contains maintenance and repair procedure for the 2005 INFINITI FX35/FX45.
- In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle, this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the PRECAUTIONS in the GI section be completely understood before starting any repair task.
- All information in this manual is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at any time without notice.
PRECAUTIONS :
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ABS00A37
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS:
2005 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
fwd............................................................................................................................. 1 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 1 FOREWORD.................................................................................................................... 2 A: GENERAL INFORMATION...................................................................................................... 1 GI - General Information................................................................................................ 0 B: ENGINE................................................................................................................... 1 EM - Engine Mechanical.................................................................................................. 0 LU - Engine Lubrication System.......................................................................................... 0 CO - Engine Cooling System.............................................................................................. 0 EC - Engine Control System.............................................................................................. 0 FL - Fuel System........................................................................................................ 0 EX - Exhaust System..................................................................................................... 0 ACC - Accelerator Control System........................................................................................ 0 C: TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE................................................................................................... 1 AT - Automatic Transmission............................................................................................. 0 D: DRIVELINE/AXLE........................................................................................................... 1 TF - Transfer........................................................................................................... 0 PR - Propeller Shaft.................................................................................................... 0 FFD - Front Final Drive................................................................................................. 0 RFD - Rear Final Drive.................................................................................................. 0 FAX - Front Axle........................................................................................................ 0 RAX - Rear Axle......................................................................................................... 0 E: SUSPENSION............................................................................................................... 1 FSU - Front Suspension.................................................................................................. 0 RSU - Rear Suspension................................................................................................... 0 WT - Road Wheels & Tires................................................................................................ 0 F: BRAKES................................................................................................................... 1 BR - Brake System....................................................................................................... 0 PB - Parking Brake System............................................................................................... 0 BRC - Brake Control System.............................................................................................. 0 G: STEERING................................................................................................................. 1 PS - Power Steering System.............................................................................................. 0 H: RESTRAINTS............................................................................................................... 1 SB - Seat Belts......................................................................................................... 0 SRS - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)............................................................................... 0 I: BODY..................................................................................................................... 1 BL - Body, Lock & Security System....................................................................................... 0 GW - Glasses, Window System & Mirrors................................................................................... 0 RF - Roof............................................................................................................... 0 EI - Exterior & Interior................................................................................................ 0 IP - Instrument Panel................................................................................................... 0 SE - Seat............................................................................................................... 0 J: AIR CONDITIONER.......................................................................................................... 1 ATC - Automatic Air Conditioner......................................................................................... 0 K: ELECTRICAL............................................................................................................... 1 SC - Starting & Charging System......................................................................................... 0 LT - Lighting System.................................................................................................... 0 DI - Driver Information System.......................................................................................... 0 WW - Wiper, Washer & Horn............................................................................................... 0 BCS - Body Control System............................................................................................... 0 LAN - LAN System........................................................................................................ 0 AV - Audio Visual, Navigation & Telephone System........................................................................ 0 ACS - Auto Cruise Control System........................................................................................ 0 PG - Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements............................................................................ 0 L: MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 1 MA - Maintenance........................................................................................................ 0 M: INDEX.................................................................................................................... 1 IDX - Alphabetical Index................................................................................................ 1 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT................................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS............................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)............................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B)............................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX............................................................................................ 82 Comment Sheet............................................................................................................... 3 Inch to Metric Conversion Table............................................................................................. 4 QUICK REFERENCE CHART....................................................................................................... 5 acc............................................................................................................................. 8 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 8 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 9 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 9 ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM.............................................................................................. 10 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 10 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 10 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 10 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION................................................................................... 10 acs............................................................................................................................. 12 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 12 ASCD.................................................................................................................... 14 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)............................................................................... 14 Description..................................................................................................... 14 ICC..................................................................................................................... 15 PRECAUTIONS......................................................................................................... 15 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”..................... 15 Precautions for ICC System Service.............................................................................. 15 PREPARATION......................................................................................................... 16 Special Service Tools........................................................................................... 16 DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................... 17 Outline......................................................................................................... 17 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE.................................................................... 17 CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODE.............................................................. 17 BRAKE ASSIST (WITH PREVIEW FUNCTION)........................................................................ 17 System Diagram.................................................................................................. 17 Components Description.......................................................................................... 18 CAN Communication............................................................................................... 18 CAN COMMUNICATION UNIT...................................................................................... 18 Switch Operation................................................................................................ 19 ICC System Display.............................................................................................. 19 ACTION TEST......................................................................................................... 20 ICC System Running Test......................................................................................... 20 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE.................................................................... 20 Set Checking............................................................................................ 20 Check For Increase Of Cruising Speed.................................................................... 20 Check For Decrease Of Cruising Speed.................................................................... 20 Check For Cancellation Of Vehicle-To-Vehicle Distance Control Mode (Normal Driving Condition) In ....... 20 Check For Restoring Speed That Is Set By Vehicle-To-Vehicle Distance Control Mode Before Cancella....... 20 Check For MAIN Switch................................................................................... 21 Check For RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST, CANCEL Switches................................................. 21 Check For Distance Switch............................................................................... 21 CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODE.............................................................. 21 Set Checking............................................................................................ 21 Check For Increase Of Cruising Speed.................................................................... 22 Check For Decrease Of Cruising Speed.................................................................... 22 Check For Cancellation Of Conventional (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode (Normal Driving Conditio....... 22 Check For Restoring Speed That Is Set By Conventional (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode Before IC....... 22 Check For MAIN Switch................................................................................... 22 Check For RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST, CANCEL Switches................................................. 22 LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................ 23 Outline......................................................................................................... 23 Preparation..................................................................................................... 23 Outline of Adjustment Procedure................................................................................. 23 Setting the ICC Target Board.................................................................................... 23 ADJUSTING HEIGHT OF THE TARGET.............................................................................. 23 ADJUSTING THE RIGHT-LEFT POSITION OF THE TARGET............................................................. 24 SETTING THE TARGET.......................................................................................... 24 Aiming Adjustment............................................................................................... 25 CHECK AFTER THE ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................. 28 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION........................................................................................... 29 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location.................................................................. 29 WIRING DIAGRAM...................................................................................................... 30 Schematic....................................................................................................... 30 Wiring Diagram — ICC —.......................................................................................... 31 TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE....................................................................................... 38 Terminals and Reference Value for ICC Unit...................................................................... 38 Terminals and Reference Value for ICC Sensor.................................................................... 39 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION............................................................................. 40 Work Flow....................................................................................................... 40 CONSULT-II Function............................................................................................. 41 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 41 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION.................................................................................. 41 WORK SUPPORT................................................................................................ 42 Work Item............................................................................................... 42 Cause of Auto-Cancel.................................................................................... 42 Laser Beam Adjust....................................................................................... 42 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS..................................................................................... 43 DATA MONITOR................................................................................................ 43 Operation Procedure..................................................................................... 43 Monitored Item.......................................................................................... 43 ACTIVE TEST................................................................................................. 45 ICC BUZZER 1............................................................................................ 45 METER LAMP.............................................................................................. 45 STOP LAMP............................................................................................... 45 BOOSTER SOL/V 3......................................................................................... 46 Self-Diagnostic Function........................................................................................ 47 WITH CONSULT-II............................................................................................. 47 WITHOUT CONSULT-II.......................................................................................... 47 Self-Diagnostic Erasing Method.......................................................................... 48 SELF-DIAGNOSIS BY ICC SYSTEM DISPLAY WILL NOT RUN........................................................... 49 Possible Irregular Condition............................................................................ 49 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS......................................................................... 52 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart............................................................................. 52 DTC 11 CONTROL UNIT............................................................................................. 53 DTC 20 CAN COMM CIRCUIT......................................................................................... 54 DTC 31 POWER SUPPLY CIR, DTC 34 POWER SUPPLY CIR 2.............................................................. 54 DTC 41 VHCL SPEED SE CIRC....................................................................................... 55 DTC 43 ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC......................................................................................... 56 DTC 45 BRAKE SW/STOP L SW....................................................................................... 56 DTC 46 OPERATION SW CIRC........................................................................................ 58 DTC 61 PRESS SEN CIRCUIT........................................................................................ 59 DTC 62 BOOSTER SOL/V CIRCUIT.................................................................................... 61 DTC 63 RELEASE SW CIRCUIT....................................................................................... 62 DTC 65 PRESSURE CONTROL......................................................................................... 63 DTC 74 LASER BEAM OFF CNTR...................................................................................... 64 DTC 90 STOP LAMP RLY FIX........................................................................................ 64 DTC 92 ECM CIRCUIT.............................................................................................. 70 DTC 96 NP RANGE................................................................................................. 71 DTC 97 AT CIRCUIT............................................................................................... 72 DTC 98 GEAR POSITION............................................................................................ 72 DTC 102 RADAR STAIN............................................................................................. 73 DTC 103 LASER SENSOR FAIL....................................................................................... 74 DTC 104 LASER AIMING INCMP...................................................................................... 74 DTC 107 LASER COMM FAIL......................................................................................... 74 DTC 109 LASER HIGH TEMP......................................................................................... 75 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS...................................................................................... 76 Symptom Chart................................................................................................... 76 Symptom 1: MAIN Switch Does Not Turn ON......................................................................... 77 Symptom 2: ICC System Cannot Be Set (MAIN Switch Turns ON/OFF).................................................. 77 Symptom 3: ICC System Cannot Be Operated by CANCEL Switch, RESUME/ ACCELERATE Switch or DISTANCE ............... 78 Symptom 4: ICC System Is Not Cancelled When the Gear Is in Other Than “D”....................................... 79 Symptom 5: Chime Does Not Sound................................................................................. 79 Symptom 6: Driving Force Is Hunting............................................................................. 80 Symptom 7: ICC System Frequently Cannot Detect the Vehicle Ahead/ Detection Zone Is Short....................... 80 Symptom 8: The System Does Not Detect the Vehicle Ahead at All.................................................. 81 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT INSPECTION..................................................................................... 82 ICC Steering Switch............................................................................................. 82 ICC Brake Switch and Stop Lamp Switch........................................................................... 82 Boost Solenoid.................................................................................................. 82 Release Switch.................................................................................................. 83 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION............................................................................................ 84 ICC Unit........................................................................................................ 84 REMOVAL..................................................................................................... 84 INSTALLATION................................................................................................ 84 ICC Sensor...................................................................................................... 84 REMOVAL..................................................................................................... 84 INSTALLATION................................................................................................ 85 ICC Steering Switch............................................................................................. 85 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 82 at.............................................................................................................................. 86 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 86 INDEX FOR DTC........................................................................................................... 90 Alphabetical Index.................................................................................................. 90 DTC No. Index....................................................................................................... 91 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 92 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 92 Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine.................................................. 92 Precautions......................................................................................................... 93 Service Notice or Precautions....................................................................................... 94 ATF COOLER SERVICE.............................................................................................. 94 OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS........................................................................................... 94 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 95 Special Service Tools............................................................................................... 95 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 96 A/T FLUID............................................................................................................... 97 Changing A/T Fluid.................................................................................................. 97 Checking A/T Fluid.................................................................................................. 98 A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning........................................................................................... 100 A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE............................................................................. 100 A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE............................................................................ 101 A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................... 102 A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION............................................................................... 102 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM...................................................................................................... 103 Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)................................................................................... 103 Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models)................................................................................... 104 Shift Mechanism..................................................................................................... 105 CONSTRUCTION.................................................................................................... 105 FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE.................................................................................... 105 CLUTCH AND BAND CHART........................................................................................... 106 POWER TRANSMISSION.............................................................................................. 107 “N” Position................................................................................................ 107 “P” Position................................................................................................ 107 "D1" Position............................................................................................... 108 “M1” Position............................................................................................... 109 "D2" Position............................................................................................... 110 “M2” Position............................................................................................... 111 "D3" and "M3" Positions..................................................................................... 112 "D4" and "M4" Positions..................................................................................... 113 "D5" and "M5" Positions..................................................................................... 114 “R” Position................................................................................................ 115 TCM Function........................................................................................................ 116 CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE.......................................................................................... 116 CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM.......................................................................................... 116 CAN Communication................................................................................................... 117 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 117 Input/Output Signal of TCM.......................................................................................... 117 Line Pressure Control............................................................................................... 118 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC PATTERN.................................. 118 Normal Control.............................................................................................. 118 Back-Up Control (Engine Brake).............................................................................. 118 During Shift Change......................................................................................... 119 At Low Fluid Temperature.................................................................................... 119 Shift Control....................................................................................................... 119 SHIFT CHANGE.................................................................................................... 120 Shift Change System Diagram................................................................................. 120 Lock-up Control..................................................................................................... 120 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL................................................................... 120 Lock-up Control System Diagram.............................................................................. 120 Lock-up Released............................................................................................ 121 Lock-up Applied............................................................................................. 121 SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL.......................................................................................... 121 Half-clutched State......................................................................................... 121 Slip Lock-up Control........................................................................................ 121 Engine Brake Control................................................................................................ 121 Control Valve....................................................................................................... 122 FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE....................................................................................... 122 FUNCTION OF ATF PRESSURE SWITCH................................................................................. 123 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM........................................................................................ 124 Introduction........................................................................................................ 124 OBD-II Function for A/T System...................................................................................... 124 One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II........................................................................... 124 ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC........................................................................................ 124 TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC........................................................................................ 124 OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)................................................................................ 124 HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC................................................................................ 124 Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data............................................................ 125 HOW TO ERASE DTC................................................................................................ 125 HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II).............................................................................. 126 HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)..................................................................................... 127 HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)..................................................................................... 127 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).................................................................................... 127 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 127 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS....................................................................................................... 128 DTC Inspection Priority Chart....................................................................................... 128 Fail-safe........................................................................................................... 128 FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 128 Vehicle Speed Sensor........................................................................................ 128 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor........................................................................... 128 Throttle Position Sensor.................................................................................... 128 PNP Switch.................................................................................................. 128 Starter Relay............................................................................................... 128 A/T Interlock............................................................................................... 129 A/T 1st Engine Braking...................................................................................... 129 Line Pressure Solenoid...................................................................................... 129 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid............................................................................ 129 Low Coast Brake Solenoid.................................................................................... 129 Input Clutch Solenoid....................................................................................... 129 Direct Clutch Solenoid...................................................................................... 129 Front Brake Solenoid........................................................................................ 129 High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid........................................................................ 129 Turbine Revolution Sensor 1 or 2............................................................................ 129 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair...................................................... 130 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................... 130 WORK FLOW....................................................................................................... 131 Work Flow Chart............................................................................................. 131 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET............................................................................................ 132 Information from Customer................................................................................... 132 Diagnostic Worksheet Chart.................................................................................. 132 A/T Electrical Parts Location....................................................................................... 135 Circuit Diagram..................................................................................................... 136 Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis................................................................................ 137 A/T CHECK....................................................................................................... 137 A/T Fluid Leakage and A/T Fluid Level Check................................................................. 137 A/T Fluid Condition Check................................................................................... 137 STALL TEST...................................................................................................... 137 Stall Test Procedure........................................................................................ 137 Judgement of Stall Test..................................................................................... 138 LINE PRESSURE TEST.............................................................................................. 139 Line Pressure Test Port..................................................................................... 139 Line Pressure Test Procedure................................................................................ 139 Line Pressure............................................................................................... 140 Judgement of Line Pressure Test............................................................................. 140 ROAD TEST....................................................................................................... 141 Description................................................................................................. 141 Check Before Engine Is Started...................................................................................... 141 Check at Idle....................................................................................................... 142 Cruise Test - Part 1................................................................................................ 143 Cruise Test - Part 2................................................................................................ 145 Cruise Test - Part 3................................................................................................ 146 Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs......................................................................... 147 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 147 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 147 Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases...................................................................... 148 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 148 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 148 Symptom Chart....................................................................................................... 149 TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values............................................................................ 174 A/T ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT.................................................................. 174 TCM INSPECTION TABLE............................................................................................ 174 CONSULT-II Function (A/T)........................................................................................... 175 FUNCTION........................................................................................................ 175 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE...................................................................................... 175 CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE.................................................................................... 177 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE..................................................................................... 178 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 178 Display Items List.......................................................................................... 178 How to Erase Self-Diagnostic Results........................................................................ 181 DATA MONITOR MODE............................................................................................... 181 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 181 Display Items List.......................................................................................... 181 CAN DIAGNOSTIC SUPPORT MONITOR MODE............................................................................. 185 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 185 DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE........................................................................................... 185 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 185 Display Items List.......................................................................................... 187 Diagnostic Procedure without CONSULT-II............................................................................. 188 OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)..................................................................... 188 OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)..................................................................... 188 TCM SEL......................................................................................................... 188 Description................................................................................................. 188 Diagnostic Procedure........................................................................................ 188 Judgement Self-diagnosis Code............................................................................... 189 Erase Self-Diagnosis........................................................................................ 190 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE........................................................................................ 191 Description......................................................................................................... 191 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 191 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 191 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 191 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 191 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 191 Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN........................................................................................... 192 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 193 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT.......................................................................................... 194 Description......................................................................................................... 194 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 194 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 194 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 194 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 194 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 194 Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG......................................................................................... 195 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 196 DTC P0700 TCM........................................................................................................... 198 Description......................................................................................................... 198 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 198 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 198 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 198 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 198 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 198 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 198 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH.................................................................................. 199 Description......................................................................................................... 199 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 199 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 199 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 199 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 199 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 199 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 199 Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW........................................................................................ 200 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 201 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR).................................................................. 203 Description......................................................................................................... 203 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 203 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 203 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 203 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 203 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 203 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 204 Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T........................................................................................ 205 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 206 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL........................................................................................... 208 Description......................................................................................................... 208 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 208 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 208 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 208 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 208 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 208 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 208 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 209 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE........................................................................ 210 Description......................................................................................................... 210 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 210 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 210 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 210 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 210 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 210 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 210 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 211 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)................................................................................ 212 Description......................................................................................................... 212 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 212 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 212 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 212 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 212 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 212 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 213 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 213 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................. 214 Description......................................................................................................... 214 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 214 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 214 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 214 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 214 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 214 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 214 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 215 DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM)............................................................................. 216 Description......................................................................................................... 216 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 216 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 216 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 216 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 216 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 216 DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM)............................................................................. 217 Description......................................................................................................... 217 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 217 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 217 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 217 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 217 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 217 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR...................................................................................... 218 Description......................................................................................................... 218 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 218 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 218 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 218 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 218 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 218 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 218 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 219 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT.......................................................................... 221 Description......................................................................................................... 221 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 221 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 221 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 221 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 221 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 221 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 221 Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS........................................................................................... 222 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 223 Component Inspection................................................................................................ 225 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1.................................................................................. 225 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2.................................................................................. 225 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR..................................................................................... 226 Description......................................................................................................... 226 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 226 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 226 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 226 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 226 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 226 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 226 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 227 DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR...................................................................................... 228 Description......................................................................................................... 228 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 228 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 228 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 228 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 228 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 228 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 229 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK................................................................................................. 230 Description......................................................................................................... 230 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 230 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 230 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 230 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 230 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 230 Judgement of A/T Interlock.......................................................................................... 230 A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE............................................................................ 231 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 231 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING........................................................................................ 233 Description......................................................................................................... 233 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 233 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 233 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 233 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 233 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 233 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 234 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE................................................................................... 235 Description......................................................................................................... 235 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 235 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 235 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 235 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 235 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 235 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 235 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 236 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION.......................................................................... 237 Description......................................................................................................... 237 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 237 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 237 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 237 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 237 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 237 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 238 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 238 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................... 239 Description......................................................................................................... 239 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 239 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 239 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 239 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 239 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 239 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 239 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 240 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION........................................................................... 241 Description......................................................................................................... 241 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 241 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 241 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 241 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 241 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 241 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 242 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 242 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................. 243 Description......................................................................................................... 243 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 243 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 243 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 243 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 243 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 243 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 243 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 244 DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION......................................................................... 245 Description......................................................................................................... 245 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 245 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 245 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 245 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 245 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 245 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 245 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 246 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................... 247 Description......................................................................................................... 247 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 247 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 247 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 247 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 247 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 247 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 247 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 248 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION........................................................... 249 Description......................................................................................................... 249 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 249 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 249 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 249 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 249 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 249 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 250 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 250 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE................................................................................ 251 Description......................................................................................................... 251 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 251 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 251 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 251 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 251 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 251 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 251 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 252 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION....................................................................... 253 Description......................................................................................................... 253 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 253 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 253 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 253 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 253 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 253 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 253 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 254 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH............................................................................................ 255 Description......................................................................................................... 255 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode..................................................................... 255 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 255 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 255 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 255 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 255 Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW.......................................................................................... 256 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 258 Component Inspection................................................................................................ 259 MANUAL MODE SWITCH.............................................................................................. 259 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1......................................................................................... 260 Description......................................................................................................... 260 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 260 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 260 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 260 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 260 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 260 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 261 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3......................................................................................... 262 Description......................................................................................................... 262 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 262 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 262 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 262 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 262 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 262 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 263 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5......................................................................................... 264 Description......................................................................................................... 264 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 264 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 264 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 264 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 264 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 264 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 265 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6......................................................................................... 266 Description......................................................................................................... 266 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 266 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 266 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 266 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 266 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 266 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 267 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.................................................................................... 268 Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN.......................................................................................... 268 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 269 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIRCUIT........................................................ 272 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 272 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 272 BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT.................................................................................................... 273 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 273 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 273 A/T INDICATOR CIRCUIT................................................................................................... 274 Description......................................................................................................... 274 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 274 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 274 A/T INDICATOR SYMPTOM CHART..................................................................................... 274 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS.......................................................................................... 275 Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC........................................................................................ 275 A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On........................................................................... 278 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 278 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 278 Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” or “N” Position..................................................................... 279 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 279 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 279 In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed.......................................................................... 280 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 280 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 280 In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves...................................................................................... 281 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 281 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 281 Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position)................................................................................... 282 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 282 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 282 Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in “R” Position..................................................................... 285 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 285 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 285 Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D” Position...................................................................... 288 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 288 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 288 Vehicle Cannot Be Started from D1................................................................................... 290 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 290 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 290 A/T Does Not Shift: D1 -> D2........................................................................................ 293 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 293 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 293 A/T Does Not Shift: D2 -> D3........................................................................................ 295 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 295 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 295 A/T Does Not Shift: D3 -> D4........................................................................................ 297 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 297 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 297 A/T Does Not Shift: D4 -> D5........................................................................................ 300 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 300 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 300 A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up........................................................................................ 302 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 302 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 302 A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition................................................................................. 304 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 304 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 304 Lock-up Is Not Released............................................................................................. 306 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 306 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 306 Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle................................................................................ 306 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 306 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 306 Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode.................................................................................... 308 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 308 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 308 A/T Does Not Shift: 5th Gear -> 4th Gear............................................................................ 308 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 308 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 308 A/T Does Not Shift: 4th Gear -> 3rd Gear............................................................................ 310 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 310 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 310 A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd Gear -> 2nd Gear............................................................................ 312 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 312 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 312 A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd Gear -> 1st Gear............................................................................ 314 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 314 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 314 Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by Engine Brake......................................................................... 316 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 316 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 316 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM.................................................................................................... 318 Control Device Removal and Installation............................................................................. 318 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 319 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 319 Control Rod Removal and Installation................................................................................ 319 CONTROL ROD COMPONENTS.......................................................................................... 319 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 319 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 320 Adjustment of A/T Position.......................................................................................... 320 Checking of A/T Position............................................................................................ 320 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM................................................................................................... 321 Description......................................................................................................... 321 Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location......................................................................... 321 Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT......................................................................................... 322 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 323 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE..................................................................................................... 325 Components.......................................................................................................... 325 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 326 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 326 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 327 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE...................................................................................................... 328 Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2........................................................... 328 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 328 CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................ 328 Removal..................................................................................................... 328 Installation................................................................................................ 332 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................... 336 Removal..................................................................................................... 336 Installation................................................................................................ 338 Parking Components (2WD Models Only)................................................................................ 340 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 340 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 340 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 343 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 344 Rear Oil Seal....................................................................................................... 347 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 347 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 347 Revolution Sensor Components (2WD Models Only)...................................................................... 348 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 348 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 348 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 350 AIR BREATHER HOSE....................................................................................................... 353 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 353 VQ35DE ENGINE MODEL............................................................................................. 353 VK45DE ENGINE MODEL............................................................................................. 354 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY................................................................................................... 355 Removal and Installation (2WD Models)............................................................................... 355 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 355 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 355 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 356 Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter............................................................. 356 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 357 Removal and Installation (AWD Models)............................................................................... 358 COMPONENTS (FOR VQ35DE)......................................................................................... 358 COMPONENTS (FOR VK45DE)......................................................................................... 359 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 359 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 361 Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter............................................................. 361 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 361 OVERHAUL................................................................................................................ 363 Components.......................................................................................................... 363 Oil Channel......................................................................................................... 371 Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings........................................ 373 DISASSEMBLY............................................................................................................. 375 Disassembly......................................................................................................... 375 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS.............................................................................................. 393 Oil Pump............................................................................................................ 393 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 393 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 393 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 394 Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-way Clutch.................................................................................. 396 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 396 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 396 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 397 3rd One-way Clutch.......................................................................................... 397 Front Sun Gear Snap Ring.................................................................................... 397 Front Sun Gear.............................................................................................. 397 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 397 Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear..................................................................... 398 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 398 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 399 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 400 Front Carrier Snap Ring..................................................................................... 400 Input Clutch Snap Ring...................................................................................... 400 Input Clutch Drum........................................................................................... 400 Input Clutch Drive Plates................................................................................... 400 Input Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates............................................................. 400 Front Carrier............................................................................................... 400 Rear Internal Gear.......................................................................................... 400 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 401 Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub........................................................ 403 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 403 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 403 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 405 High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub Snap Ring, Rear Sun Gear Snap Ring.......................................... 405 1st One-way Clutch.......................................................................................... 405 Mid Sun Gear................................................................................................ 405 Rear Sun Gear............................................................................................... 405 High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub............................................................................. 405 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 406 High and Low Reverse Clutch......................................................................................... 408 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 408 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 409 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 409 High and Low Reverse Clutch Snap Ring....................................................................... 409 High and Low Reverse Clutch Drive Plates.................................................................... 409 High and Low Reverse Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates.............................................. 409 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 409 Direct Clutch....................................................................................................... 411 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 411 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 412 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 412 Direct Clutch Snap Ring..................................................................................... 412 Direct Clutch Drive Plates.................................................................................. 412 Direct Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates............................................................ 412 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 412 ASSEMBLY................................................................................................................ 413 Assembly (1)........................................................................................................ 413 Adjustment.......................................................................................................... 426 TOTAL END PLAY.................................................................................................. 426 Assembly (2)........................................................................................................ 429 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)................................................................................... 436 General Specifications.............................................................................................. 436 Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs......................................................................... 436 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 436 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 436 Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases...................................................................... 437 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 437 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 437 Stall Speed......................................................................................................... 437 Line Pressure....................................................................................................... 437 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor........................................................................................ 437 Turbine Revolution Sensor........................................................................................... 438 Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor)........................................................................ 438 Reverse Brake....................................................................................................... 438 Total End Play...................................................................................................... 438 BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY....................................................................... 438 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 82 atc............................................................................................................................. 440 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 440 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 444 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 444 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect.......................................... 444 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 444 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover................................................................... 445 Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)...................................................................... 445 CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT........................................................................................ 446 General Refrigerant Precautions..................................................................................... 446 Precautions for Refrigerant Connection.............................................................................. 447 ABOUT ONE-TOUCH JOINT........................................................................................... 447 Description................................................................................................. 447 FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION..................................................................... 449 O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION............................................................................... 450 VQ35DE...................................................................................................... 450 VK45DE...................................................................................................... 450 O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications...................................................................... 451 Precautions for Servicing Compressor................................................................................ 452 Precautions for Service Equipment................................................................................... 452 RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT.................................................................................... 452 ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR........................................................................................ 452 VACUUM PUMP..................................................................................................... 453 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET.............................................................................................. 453 SERVICE HOSES................................................................................................... 453 SERVICE COUPLERS................................................................................................ 454 REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE........................................................................................ 454 CHARGING CYLINDER............................................................................................... 454 Precautions for Leak Detection Dye.................................................................................. 455 IDENTIFICATION.................................................................................................. 455 IDENTIFICATION LABEL FOR VEHICLE................................................................................ 455 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 456 Special Service Tools............................................................................................... 456 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment....................................................................... 457 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 459 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM.................................................................................................... 460 Refrigerant Cycle................................................................................................... 460 REFRIGERANT FLOW................................................................................................ 460 FREEZE PROTECTION............................................................................................... 460 Refrigerant System Protection....................................................................................... 460 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR..................................................................................... 460 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE........................................................................................... 460 V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor................................................................................ 461 GENERAL INFORMATION............................................................................................. 461 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 462 General..................................................................................................... 462 Operation................................................................................................... 463 Component Layout.................................................................................................... 465 LUBRICANT............................................................................................................... 466 Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor..................................................................... 466 LUBRICANT....................................................................................................... 466 LUBRICANT RETURN OPERATION...................................................................................... 466 LUBRICANT ADJUSTING PROCEDURE FOR COMPONENTS REPLACEMENT EXCEPT COMPRESSOR...................................... 467 LUBRICANT ADJUSTING PROCEDURE FOR COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT........................................................ 468 AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL................................................................................................. 469 Description of Air Conditioner LAN Control System................................................................... 469 System Construction................................................................................................. 469 OPERATION....................................................................................................... 469 TRANSMISSION DATA AND TRANSMISSION ORDER........................................................................ 470 Start:...................................................................................................... 470 Address:.................................................................................................... 470 Opening Angle:.............................................................................................. 470 Error Check:................................................................................................ 470 Stop Signal:................................................................................................ 471 AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL (AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL)............................................................ 471 FAN SPEED CONTROL............................................................................................... 471 INTAKE DOOR CONTROL............................................................................................. 471 OUTLET DOOR CONTROL............................................................................................. 471 MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL........................................................................................... 472 SELF-DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM........................................................................................... 472 Description of Control System....................................................................................... 473 Control Operation................................................................................................... 473 DISPLAY SCREEN.................................................................................................. 473 AUTO SWITCH..................................................................................................... 474 TEMPERATURE SWITCH (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL) (DRIVER SIDE)................................................. 474 TEMPERATURE SWITCH (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL) (PASSENGER SIDE).............................................. 474 RECIRCULATION (REC) SWITCH...................................................................................... 474 FRESH (FRE) SWITCH.............................................................................................. 474 DEFROSTER (DEF) SWITCH.......................................................................................... 474 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH..................................................................................... 474 OFF SWITCH...................................................................................................... 474 A/C SWITCH...................................................................................................... 474 MODE SWITCH..................................................................................................... 474 FAN SWITCH...................................................................................................... 474 DUAL SWITCH (WITH LEFT AND RIGHT VENTILATION TEMPERATURE SEPARATELY CONTROL SYSTEM)............................. 474 Fail-safe Function.................................................................................................. 475 Discharge Air Flow.................................................................................................. 476 System Description.................................................................................................. 477 SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION............................................................................. 477 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 478 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS....................................................................................................... 479 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)........................................................................................... 479 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION...................................................................................... 479 DATA MONITOR.................................................................................................... 480 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 480 Display Item List........................................................................................... 480 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair...................................................... 481 WORK FLOW....................................................................................................... 481 SYMPTOM TABLE................................................................................................... 481 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 482 ENGINE COMPARTMENT.............................................................................................. 482 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT........................................................................................... 483 Schematic........................................................................................................... 484 Wiring Diagram —A/C—................................................................................................ 485 Auto Amp. Terminals and Reference Value............................................................................. 490 PIN CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT................................................................................... 490 TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FOR UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP..................................................... 490 Self-diagnosis Function............................................................................................. 492 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 492 FUNCTION CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 493 AUXILIARY MECHANISM: TEMPERATURE SETTING TRIMMER................................................................ 498 AUXILIARY MECHANISM: FOOT POSITION SETTING TRIMMER.............................................................. 499 AUXILIARY MECHANISM: INLET PORT MEMORY FUNCTION................................................................. 499 Operational Check................................................................................................... 500 CHECKING MEMORY FUNCTION........................................................................................ 500 CHECKING BLOWER................................................................................................. 500 CHECKING DISCHARGE AIR.......................................................................................... 500 CHECKING INTAKE AIR............................................................................................. 501 CHECKING TEMPERATURE DECREASE................................................................................... 501 CHECKING TEMPERATURE INCREASE................................................................................... 501 CHECK A/C SWITCH................................................................................................ 501 CHECKING AUTO MODE.............................................................................................. 502 Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Auto Amp........................................................................ 502 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 502 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 503 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. (Automatic Amplifier)............................................................ 503 Potentio Temperature Control (PTC).......................................................................... 503 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM.............................................................................. 503 LAN System Circuit.................................................................................................. 505 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR LAN CIRCUIT............................................................................. 505 Mode Door Motor Circuit............................................................................................. 509 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 509 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 510 Component Parts............................................................................................. 510 System Operation............................................................................................ 510 Mode Door Control Specification............................................................................. 511 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 511 Mode Door Motor............................................................................................. 511 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR......................................................................... 511 Air Mix Door Motor Circuit.......................................................................................... 512 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 512 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 513 Component Parts............................................................................................. 513 System Operation............................................................................................ 513 Air Mix Door Control Specification.......................................................................... 513 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 514 Air Mix Door Motor.......................................................................................... 514 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR...................................................................... 514 Air Mix Door Motor PBR Circuit...................................................................................... 514 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR PBR.................................................................. 514 Intake Door Motor Circuit........................................................................................... 515 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 515 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 516 Component Parts............................................................................................. 516 System Operation............................................................................................ 516 Intake Door Control Specification........................................................................... 516 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 517 Intake Door Motor........................................................................................... 517 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR....................................................................... 517 Blower Motor Circuit................................................................................................ 518 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 518 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 519 Component Parts............................................................................................. 519 System Operation............................................................................................ 519 Automatic Mode.............................................................................................. 519 Starting Fan Speed Control.................................................................................. 520 Blower Speed Compensation................................................................................... 520 Fan Speed Control Specification............................................................................. 520 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 520 Brush-Less Motor............................................................................................ 520 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR............................................................................ 520 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 522 Blower Motor................................................................................................ 522 Magnet Clutch Circuit............................................................................................... 523 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 523 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 524 Low Temperature Protection Control.......................................................................... 524 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH........................................................................... 524 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 529 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor................................................................................. 529 Insufficient Cooling................................................................................................ 530 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 530 PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................... 532 PERFORMANCE CHART............................................................................................... 534 Test Condition.............................................................................................. 534 Test Reading................................................................................................ 534 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR UNUSUAL PRESSURE.......................................................................... 535 Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too High.............................................................. 535 High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low............................................. 535 High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High............................................. 536 Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low............................................................... 536 Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative................................................................ 537 Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative.......................................................................... 537 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INSUFFICIENT COOLING.................................................................... 537 Insufficient Heating................................................................................................ 539 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 539 Noise............................................................................................................... 540 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 540 Self-diagnosis...................................................................................................... 541 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 541 Memory Function..................................................................................................... 542 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 542 Ambient Sensor Circuit.............................................................................................. 543 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 543 Ambient Sensor.............................................................................................. 543 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS............................................................................... 543 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT SENSOR.......................................................................... 543 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 545 Ambient Sensor.............................................................................................. 545 In-vehicle Sensor Circuit........................................................................................... 546 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 546 In-vehicle Sensor........................................................................................... 546 Aspirator................................................................................................... 546 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR IN-VEHICLE SENSOR....................................................................... 547 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 548 In-vehicle Sensor........................................................................................... 548 Sunload Sensor Circuit.............................................................................................. 549 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 549 Sunload Sensor.............................................................................................. 549 SUNLOAD INPUT PROCESS........................................................................................... 549 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR SUNLOAD SENSOR.......................................................................... 549 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 551 Sunload Sensor.............................................................................................. 551 Intake Sensor Circuit............................................................................................... 552 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 552 Intake Sensor............................................................................................... 552 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR........................................................................... 552 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 553 Intake Sensor............................................................................................... 553 CONTROLLER.............................................................................................................. 554 Removal and Installation of A/C and AV Switch....................................................................... 554 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 554 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 554 AUTO AMP................................................................................................................ 555 Removal and Installation of Unified Meter and A/C Amp............................................................... 555 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 555 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 555 AMBIENT SENSOR.......................................................................................................... 556 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 556 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 556 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 556 IN-VEHICLE SENSOR....................................................................................................... 557 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 557 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 557 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 557 SUNLOAD SENSOR.......................................................................................................... 558 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 558 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 558 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 558 INTAKE SENSOR........................................................................................................... 559 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 559 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 559 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 559 BLOWER UNIT............................................................................................................. 560 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 560 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 560 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 560 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................ 561 BLOWER MOTOR............................................................................................................ 562 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 562 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 562 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 562 INTAKE DOOR MOTOR....................................................................................................... 563 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 563 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 563 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 563 IN-CABIN MICROFILTER.................................................................................................... 564 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 564 FUNCTION........................................................................................................ 564 REPLACEMENT TIMING.............................................................................................. 564 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES.......................................................................................... 564 HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................... 565 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 565 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 565 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 566 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................ 568 MODE DOOR MOTOR......................................................................................................... 570 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 570 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 570 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 570 AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR...................................................................................................... 571 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 571 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 571 Driver Side................................................................................................. 571 Passenger Side.............................................................................................. 571 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 571 HEATER CORE............................................................................................................. 572 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 572 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 572 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 572 DUCTS AND GRILLES....................................................................................................... 573 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 573 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 573 Removal of Center Ventilator Grille......................................................................... 573 Removal of Side Ventilation................................................................................. 573 Removal of Rear Ventilator Grille........................................................................... 573 Removal of Defroster Nozzle, Ducts and Ventilator Ducts..................................................... 574 Removal of Rear Ventilator Ducts............................................................................ 575 Removal of Foot Ducts....................................................................................... 576 Removal of Floor Ducts...................................................................................... 576 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 576 REFRIGERANT LINES....................................................................................................... 577 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure................................................................................. 577 SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT.......................................................................... 577 Discharging Refrigerant..................................................................................... 577 Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant.................................................................. 577 Components.......................................................................................................... 579 VQ35DE.......................................................................................................... 579 VK45DE.......................................................................................................... 580 Removal and Installation of Compressor.............................................................................. 580 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 580 VQ35DE...................................................................................................... 580 VK45DE...................................................................................................... 581 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 582 Removal and Installation of......................................................................................... 583 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 583 Overhaul.................................................................................................... 583 Inspection.................................................................................................. 584 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 585 Break-in Operation.......................................................................................... 586 Removal and Installation of Low-Pressure Flexible Hose.............................................................. 587 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 587 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 588 Removal and Installation of High-Pressure Flexible Hose............................................................. 588 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 588 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 589 Removal and Installation of Low-Pressure Pipe 1 (Engine Compartment)................................................ 589 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 589 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 590 Removal and Installation of High-Pressure Pipe 1 and 2 (Engine Compartment)......................................... 590 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 590 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 591 Removal and Installation of Low-Pressure Pipe 2 and High-Pressure Pipe 3............................................ 591 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 591 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 592 Removal and Installation of Liquid Tank............................................................................. 593 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 593 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 593 Removal and Installation of Condenser............................................................................... 594 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 594 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 594 Removal and Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor............................................................. 595 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 595 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 595 Removal and Installation of Evaporator.............................................................................. 595 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 595 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 595 Removal and Installation of Expansion Valve......................................................................... 596 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 596 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 596 Checking for Refrigerant Leaks...................................................................................... 597 Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Leak Detector....................................................... 597 Dye Injection....................................................................................................... 597 Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector................................................................................ 598 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR.......................................................................... 598 CHECKING PROCEDURE.............................................................................................. 599 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)................................................................................... 601 Compressor.......................................................................................................... 601 Lubricant........................................................................................................... 601 Refrigerant......................................................................................................... 601 Engine Idling Speed................................................................................................. 601 Belt Tension........................................................................................................ 601 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 82 av.............................................................................................................................. 602 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 602 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 606 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 606 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 607 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 607 AUDIO................................................................................................................... 608 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 608 System Description.................................................................................................. 609 BASE SYSTEM..................................................................................................... 609 BOSE SYSTEM..................................................................................................... 609 SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM................................................................................... 610 Schematic - Base System -........................................................................................... 611 Wiring Diagram - AUDIO - / Base System.............................................................................. 612 Schematic - BOSE System - With Navigation System.................................................................... 617 Wiring Diagram – AUDIO – / BOSE System With Navigation System....................................................... 618 Schematic - BOSE System - Without Navigation System................................................................. 626 Wiring Diagram – AUDIO – / BOSE System Without Navigation System.................................................... 627 Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit........................................................................ 634 Terminals and Reference Value for BOSE Speaker Amp.................................................................. 635 Terminals and Reference Value for A/C and AV Switch................................................................. 637 Terminals and Reference Value for Woofer............................................................................ 638 A/C and AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function........................................................................... 638 STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................ 638 EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................. 638 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 638 Trouble Diagnosis................................................................................................... 639 MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO, TAPE AND CD............................................................................. 639 FOR RADIO ONLY.................................................................................................. 640 FOR CASSETTE PLAYER ONLY........................................................................................ 640 FOR CD ONLY..................................................................................................... 640 Noise Inspection.................................................................................................... 641 TYPE OF NOISE AND POSSIBLE CAUSE................................................................................ 641 Power Supply Circuit Inspection..................................................................................... 642 Audio Steering Wheel Switch Inspection.............................................................................. 643 A/C and AV Switch Inspection........................................................................................ 645 BOSE Speaker Amp. Inspection........................................................................................ 645 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection..................................................................................... 646 Locking CD Auto-Changer Mechanism................................................................................... 647 DAMPER LOCK PROCEDURE........................................................................................... 647 Removal and Installation of Audio Unit.............................................................................. 648 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 648 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 648 Disassembly and Assembly for Audio Unit............................................................................. 648 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 648 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 648 Removal and Installation for A/C and AV Switch...................................................................... 649 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 649 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 649 Removal and Installation for Front Door Speaker..................................................................... 649 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 649 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 649 Removal and Installation for Rear Door Speaker...................................................................... 650 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 650 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 650 Removal and Installation for Instrument Speaker..................................................................... 650 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 650 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 650 Removal and Installation for Tweeter................................................................................ 650 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 650 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 650 Removal and Installation for Woofer (BOSE System)................................................................... 651 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 651 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 651 Removal and Installation for BOSE Speaker Amp....................................................................... 651 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 651 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 651 AUDIO ANTENNA........................................................................................................... 652 System Description.................................................................................................. 652 Wiring Diagram — M/ANT —............................................................................................ 653 Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit........................................................................ 654 Antenna Amp. Inspection............................................................................................. 654 Location of Antenna................................................................................................. 655 Window Antenna Repair............................................................................................... 655 CHECK ELEMENT................................................................................................... 655 Removal and Installation of Roof Antenna............................................................................ 657 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 657 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 657 INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM............................................................................................... 658 System Description.................................................................................................. 658 A/C AND AV SWITCH SYSTEM........................................................................................ 658 PRECAUTION OF LCD MONITOR....................................................................................... 658 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND......................................................................................... 658 DRIVE COMPUTER.................................................................................................. 659 TRIP Switch................................................................................................. 659 FUEL ECON Switch............................................................................................ 659 MAINT Switch (Maintenance Switch)........................................................................... 660 E/M SWITCH...................................................................................................... 660 SETTING SCREEN.................................................................................................. 661 Adjustable Vehicle Status................................................................................... 661 D/N SCREEN.................................................................................................. 662 WARNING INDICATIONS............................................................................................. 662 AV COMMUNICATION LINE........................................................................................... 662 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 662 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 662 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 662 Schematic........................................................................................................... 663 Wiring Diagram — INF/D —............................................................................................ 664 Schematic........................................................................................................... 669 Wiring Diagram — COMM —............................................................................................. 670 Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit...................................................................... 673 Terminals and Reference Value for A/C and AV Switch................................................................. 674 On Board Self-Diagnosis Function.................................................................................... 675 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 675 DIAGNOSIS ITEM.................................................................................................. 675 Self-Diagnosis Mode................................................................................................. 675 OPERATION PROCEDURES............................................................................................ 675 NETWORK CHECK................................................................................................... 676 PARTS CHECK..................................................................................................... 676 Display Detail Screen....................................................................................... 677 HVAC DETAIL SCREEN.............................................................................................. 677 VERSION CHECK................................................................................................... 677 CAN DIAG MNTR (CAN DIAG MONITOR)................................................................................ 677 A/C and AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function........................................................................... 678 STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................ 678 EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................. 678 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 678 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom.................................................................................. 679 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Unit.............................................................. 680 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for A/C and AV Switch......................................................... 681 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection..................................................................................... 681 Illumination Signal Inspection...................................................................................... 682 Ignition Signal Inspection.......................................................................................... 683 Audio Communication Line Inspection................................................................................. 683 AV Communication Line Inspection.................................................................................... 685 CAN Communication Line Inspection................................................................................... 686 Audio Steering Wheel Switch Inspection.............................................................................. 687 Removal and Installation of Display................................................................................. 687 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 687 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 687 Removal and Installation of A/C and AV Switch....................................................................... 687 NAVIGATION SYSTEM....................................................................................................... 688 System Description.................................................................................................. 688 TRAVEL DISTANCE................................................................................................. 688 TRAVEL DIRECTION................................................................................................ 688 MAP-MATCHING.................................................................................................... 688 GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)................................................................................. 689 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 690 NAVI Control Unit........................................................................................... 690 DVD-ROM Drive............................................................................................... 690 Map DVD-ROM................................................................................................. 690 Gyro (Angular Speed Sensor)................................................................................. 690 BIRDVIEW........................................................................................................ 690 Description................................................................................................. 691 MAP DISPLAY..................................................................................................... 691 FUNCTION OF CENTER SWITCH....................................................................................... 692 Display with Pushed “DEST” Button........................................................................... 692 Display with Pushed “ROUTE” Button.......................................................................... 693 Display with Pushed “SETTING” Button........................................................................ 694 Display Settings............................................................................................ 694 Brightness/ Contrast/ Map Back Ground....................................................................... 694 Display Off................................................................................................. 694 Setting of the Under Section Display........................................................................ 694 Vehicle Electronic Systems.................................................................................. 695 Adjust Driver Seat When Exiting Vehicle..................................................................... 695 Lift Steering Column When Exiting Vehicle................................................................... 695 Selective Door Unlock (With Intelligent Key)................................................................ 695 Keyless Remote Response -Horn............................................................................... 696 Keyless Remote Response -Lights............................................................................. 696 Auto Re-Lock Time........................................................................................... 696 Sensitivity of Automatic Headlights......................................................................... 696 Automatic Headlights Off Delay.............................................................................. 696 Speed Dependent Wiper....................................................................................... 696 Intelligent Key Lock Response-Sound......................................................................... 696 Intelligent Key Unlock Response-Beep Sound.................................................................. 696 Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock Function........................................................................ 696 Return All Settings to Default.............................................................................. 696 System Settings............................................................................................. 697 Language Setting............................................................................................ 697 Beep Setting................................................................................................ 697 Navigation Settings......................................................................................... 698 “VIEW” MODE..................................................................................................... 698 “HEADING” MODE.................................................................................................. 699 “NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS” MODE..................................................................................... 699 “SAVE CURRENT LOCATION” MODE.................................................................................... 699 “ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” MODE.................................................................................. 699 “AUTO RE-ROUTE” MODE............................................................................................ 700 “AVOID AREA SETTING” MODE....................................................................................... 700 “CLEAR MEMORY” MODE............................................................................................. 700 “EDIT ADDRESS BOOK” MODE........................................................................................ 701 “GPS INFORMATION” MODE.......................................................................................... 701 “QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTING” MODE.............................................................................. 701 “SET AVERAGE SPEED” MODE........................................................................................ 701 “TRACKING” MODE................................................................................................. 702 GUIDANCE VOLUME................................................................................................. 702 Description................................................................................................. 702 Activation/Deactivation Setting............................................................................. 702 Voice Volume Setting........................................................................................ 702 DISPLAY WITH PUSHED “TRIP” BUTTON............................................................................... 702 TRIP 1 OR TRIP 2................................................................................................ 703 FUEL ECONOMY.................................................................................................... 703 MAINTENANCE..................................................................................................... 703 ENGINE OIL OR TIRE ROTATION..................................................................................... 703 TIRE PRESSURE................................................................................................... 704 WARNING INDICATIONS............................................................................................. 704 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 705 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 705 Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location............................................................. 705 Schematic—NAVI—..................................................................................................... 706 Wiring Diagram —NAVI—............................................................................................... 707 Schematic — COMM —.................................................................................................. 714 Wiring Diagram — COMM —............................................................................................. 715 Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit................................................................. 720 Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit.............................................................. 722 Terminals and Reference Value for Display........................................................................... 726 Terminals and Reference Value for A/C and AV Switch................................................................. 728 On Board Self-Diagnosis Function.................................................................................... 729 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 729 DIAGNOSIS ITEM.................................................................................................. 729 Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)........................................................................................... 730 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 730 SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT........................................................................................... 731 Quick Reference Table....................................................................................... 731 Self-Diagnosis Codes........................................................................................ 732 Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI).......................................................................................... 732 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 732 SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT........................................................................................... 733 Quick Reference Table....................................................................................... 733 Self-diagnosis Codes........................................................................................ 733 Confirmation/Adjustment Mode........................................................................................ 734 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 734 DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS............................................................................................... 735 VEHICLE SIGNALS................................................................................................. 735 AUTO CLIMATE CONTROL............................................................................................ 736 NAVIGATION...................................................................................................... 736 DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS............................................................................................... 736 VEHICLE SIGNALS................................................................................................. 737 HISTORY OF ERRORS............................................................................................... 737 DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS.................................................................................. 738 NAVIGATION...................................................................................................... 739 Display Longitude and Latitude.............................................................................. 740 Angle Adjustment............................................................................................ 740 Speed Calibration........................................................................................... 740 Initialize Location......................................................................................... 740 CAN Diag Support Monitor............................................................................................ 741 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 741 A/C and AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function........................................................................... 742 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 742 Starting the Self-Diagnosis Mode............................................................................ 742 Exiting the Self-Diagnosis Mode............................................................................. 742 Diagnosis Function.......................................................................................... 742 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit......................................................... 743 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit...................................................... 744 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display................................................................... 745 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for A/C and AV Switch......................................................... 746 Vehicle Speed Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit.................................................................... 746 Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit................................................................. 747 Illumination Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit..................................................................... 748 Illumination Signal Check for Display Control Unit.................................................................. 749 Ignition Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit......................................................................... 749 Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit...................................................................... 749 Reverse Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit.......................................................................... 749 Reverse Signal Check for Display Control Unit....................................................................... 750 AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and NAVI Control Unit).................................... 750 Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)........................................ 751 Display Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Display)......................................... 753 AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and A/C and AV Switch).................................... 755 CAN Communication Line Check........................................................................................ 756 If NAVI Control Unit Detects That DVD-ROM Map Is Not Inserted....................................................... 756 If NAVI Control Unit Detects That Inserted DVD-ROM Map Malfunctioning Or If It Is Impossible to L................... 756 If Connection Between NAVI Control Unit and GPS AntennaIs Malfunctioning............................................ 757 RGB Screen Is Not Shown............................................................................................. 757 Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (NAVI Screen Looks Bluish)......................................................... 758 Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (NAVI Screen Looks Reddish)........................................................ 759 Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (NAVI Screen Looks Yellowish)...................................................... 760 Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Looks Bluish)......................................................... 761 Color of RGB ImageIs Not Proper (All Screens Looks Reddish)......................................................... 762 Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Looks Yellowish)...................................................... 763 RGB Screen Is Rolling (NAVI Screen)................................................................................. 764 RGB Screen Is Rolling (Excepting NAVI Screen)....................................................................... 765 Guide Sound Is Not Heard............................................................................................ 766 Screen Is Not Shown................................................................................................. 767 Audio Screen Is Not Shown (NAVI Screen Is Shown).................................................................... 767 A/C Screen Is Not Shown (NAVI Screen Is Shown)...................................................................... 767 TRIP, FUEL ECON and MAINTENANCE Screens Are Not Shown............................................................... 767 Average Fuel Economy Displayed Is Not Shown......................................................................... 768 Driving Distance or Average Speed Displayed Is Not Shown............................................................ 768 WARNING DOOR OPEN Screen Is Not Shown............................................................................... 769 Tire Pressure Is Not Displayed...................................................................................... 769 Unable to Operate All of A/C and AV Switch (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)......................................... 769 Navigation System Does Not Activate................................................................................. 770 Position of Current-Location Mark Is Not Correct.................................................................... 770 Driving Test........................................................................................................ 771 Example of Symptoms Judged Not Malfunction.......................................................................... 772 BASIC OPERATION................................................................................................. 772 VEHICLE MARK.................................................................................................... 772 DESTINATION, PASSING POINTS, AND MENU ITEMS CANNOT BE SELECTED/SET.............................................. 773 VOICE GUIDE..................................................................................................... 773 ROUTE SEARCH.................................................................................................... 773 EXAMPLES OF CURRENT-LOCATION MARK DISPLACEMENT.................................................................. 775 CURRENT LOCATION MARK SHOWS A POSITION WHICH IS COMPLETELY WRONG................................................ 778 CURRENT-LOCATION MARK JUMPS..................................................................................... 778 CURRENT LOCATION MARK IS IN A RIVER OR SEA...................................................................... 779 WHEN DRIVING ON SAME ROAD, SOMETIMES CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN RIGHT PLACE AND SOMETIMES IT IS ............... 779 LOCATION CORRECTION BY MAP-MATCHING IS SLOW..................................................................... 779 ALTHOUGH GPS RECEIVING DISPLAY IS GREEN, VEHICLE MARK DOES NOT RETURN TO CORRECT LOCATION....................... 779 NAME OF CURRENT PLACE IS NOT DISPLAYED.......................................................................... 779 CONTENTS OF DISPLAY DIFFER FOR BIRDVIEW™ AND THE (FLAT) MAP SCREEN.............................................. 779 Program Loading of NAVI Control Unit................................................................................ 780 Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit....................................................................... 781 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 781 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 781 Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna............................................................................. 781 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 781 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 781 Removal and Installation of A/C and AV Switch....................................................................... 782 Removal and Installation of Display Unit............................................................................ 782 Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit.................................................................... 782 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 782 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 782 INFINITI MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM.................................................................................... 783 System Description.................................................................................................. 783 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 784 Wiring Diagram – MES –.............................................................................................. 785 Terminals and Reference Value for DVD Player........................................................................ 787 Terminals and Reference Value for DVD Display....................................................................... 788 DVD Player Does Not Work............................................................................................ 790 Screen Is Not Shown (While Sounds Come Out of an Audio Speaker, Did Not Do of a Head Phone)......................... 792 Screen Is not Shown (Sounds Come Out of Both an Audio Speaker and a Head Phone)..................................... 794 Head Phone Does Not Sound........................................................................................... 795 Remote Controller Does Not Work..................................................................................... 796 No CD·DVD Sound From All Speakers................................................................................... 797 Removal and Installation for DVD Player............................................................................. 799 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 799 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 799 Removal and Installation for DVD Display Unit....................................................................... 799 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 799 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 800 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 82 bcs............................................................................................................................. 802 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 802 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 803 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 803 BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)............................................................................................... 804 System Description.................................................................................................. 804 BCM FUNCTION.................................................................................................... 804 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION............................................................................. 804 Description................................................................................................. 804 Operation Description....................................................................................... 804 Operation Table Of BCM and Combination Switches............................................................. 805 Sample Operation: (When Lighting Switch 1ST Position Turned ON)............................................. 806 Operation Mode.............................................................................................. 807 CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL....................................................................................... 807 BCM STATUS CONTROL.............................................................................................. 808 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY.............................................................................. 809 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R.......................................................................... 809 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND COMBINATION METER................................................................. 809 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT.............................................................. 809 MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM............................................................................. 810 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 811 Schematic........................................................................................................... 812 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)........................................................................................... 814 CONSULT–II INSPECTION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 814 ITEMS OF EACH PART.............................................................................................. 815 WORK SUPPORT.................................................................................................... 816 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 816 Display Item List........................................................................................... 816 CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)...................................................... 816 Removal and Installation of BCM..................................................................................... 817 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 817 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 817 bl.............................................................................................................................. 818 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 818 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 822 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 822 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect.......................................... 822 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 822 Precautions for Work................................................................................................ 822 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 823 Special Service Tools............................................................................................... 823 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 823 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS..................................................................................... 824 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 824 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW.............................................................................................. 824 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE.............................................................................. 825 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS................................................................................. 825 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE.................................................................... 825 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................ 825 CONFIRM THE REPAIR.............................................................................................. 826 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting........................................................................... 826 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................ 826 CENTER CONSOLE.................................................................................................. 826 DOORS........................................................................................................... 826 TRUNK........................................................................................................... 827 SUNROOF/HEADLINING.............................................................................................. 827 SEATS........................................................................................................... 827 UNDERHOOD....................................................................................................... 827 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................ 828 HOOD.................................................................................................................... 830 Fitting Adjustment.................................................................................................. 830 LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT................................................................... 830 FRONT END HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................... 830 SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT....................................................................................... 830 Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly........................................................................... 831 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 832 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 832 Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control....................................................................... 832 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 832 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 833 Hood Lock Control Inspection........................................................................................ 833 RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT................................................................................................... 835 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 835 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 835 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 836 FRONT FENDER............................................................................................................ 837 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 837 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 837 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 837 POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM.................................................................................................. 838 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 838 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 839 System Description.................................................................................................. 839 OUTLINE......................................................................................................... 840 Functions Available by Operating the Door Lock and Unlock Switches on Driver's Door and Passenger........... 840 Functions Available by Operating the Key Cylinder Switch on Driver's........................................ 840 Select Unlock Operation..................................................................................... 840 Key Reminder Door System.................................................................................... 841 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 841 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 841 Schematic/With Intelligent Key...................................................................................... 842 Wiring Diagram -D/LOCK-/With Intelligent Key........................................................................ 843 FIG. 1.......................................................................................................... 843 FIG. 2.......................................................................................................... 844 FIG. 3.......................................................................................................... 845 FIG. 4.......................................................................................................... 846 FIG. 5.......................................................................................................... 847 Schematic/Without Intelligent Key................................................................................... 848 Wiring Diagram -D/LOCK-/Without Intelligent Key..................................................................... 849 FIG. 6.......................................................................................................... 849 FIG. 7.......................................................................................................... 850 FIG. 8.......................................................................................................... 851 FIG. 9.......................................................................................................... 852 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM............................................................................... 853 Terminals and Reference Value for Intelligent Key Unit (With Intelligent Key System)................................ 853 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 853 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)........................................................................................... 854 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 854 CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEMS.................................................................................... 855 Work Support................................................................................................ 855 Data Monitor................................................................................................ 855 Active Test................................................................................................. 856 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom.................................................................................. 857 Check BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit........................................................................... 858 Check Door Switch................................................................................................... 859 CHECK DOOR SWITCH (EXCEPT BACK DOOR SWITCH)..................................................................... 859 CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH.......................................................................................... 861 Check Key Switch.................................................................................................... 863 Check Door Lock and Unlock Switch................................................................................... 865 Check Door Lock Actuator (Driver Side).............................................................................. 867 Check Door Lock Actuator (Passenger Side and Rear LH/RH)............................................................ 868 Check Fuel Lid Opener Actuator...................................................................................... 869 Check Front Door Key Cylinder Switch (Lock)......................................................................... 870 Check Front Door Key Cylinder Switch (Unlock)....................................................................... 871 Check Select Unlock Relay Circuit................................................................................... 872 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM............................................................................................. 873 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 873 System Description.................................................................................................. 874 INPUTS.......................................................................................................... 874 OPERATED PROCEDURE.............................................................................................. 875 Power Door Lock Operation................................................................................... 875 Hazard and Horn Reminder.................................................................................... 875 Auto Door Lock Operation.................................................................................... 875 Panic Alarm Operation....................................................................................... 876 Keyless Power Window Down (Open) Operation.................................................................. 876 Room Lamp and Ignition Key Ring Illumination Operation...................................................... 876 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 876 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 876 Schematic........................................................................................................... 877 Wiring Diagram — KEYLES—............................................................................................ 878 FIG. 1.......................................................................................................... 878 FIG. 2.......................................................................................................... 879 FIG. 3.......................................................................................................... 880 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM............................................................................... 881 Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R.......................................................................... 882 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)........................................................................................... 883 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 883 CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEMS.................................................................................... 884 Data Monitor................................................................................................ 884 Active Test................................................................................................. 884 Work Support................................................................................................ 885 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 886 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom.................................................................................. 887 Check Key Fob Battery and Function.................................................................................. 889 Check ACC Switch.................................................................................................... 890 Check Door Switch................................................................................................... 891 CHECK DOOR SWITCH (EXCEPT BACK DOOR SWITCH)..................................................................... 891 CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH.......................................................................................... 893 Check Key Switch.................................................................................................... 895 Check Remote Keyless Entry Receiver................................................................................. 896 Check IPDM E/R Operation............................................................................................ 899 Check Hazard Warning Lamp Function.................................................................................. 900 Check Horn Function................................................................................................. 900 Check Headlamp Function............................................................................................. 900 Check Map Lamp and Ignition Keyhole Illumination Function........................................................... 900 ID Code Entry Procedure............................................................................................. 901 KEY FOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II............................................................................... 901 KEY FOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II............................................................................ 903 Removal and Installation of Remote keyless Entry receiver........................................................... 904 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 904 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 904 Key Fob Battery Replacement......................................................................................... 905 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM.................................................................................................. 906 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 906 System Description.................................................................................................. 908 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 908 Operation Description....................................................................................... 908 Operation Condition......................................................................................... 909 Auto Door Lock Function..................................................................................... 909 Key Reminder Function....................................................................................... 909 Intelligent Key Lock-in Prevention Function................................................................. 909 REMOTE CONTROL ENTRY FUNCTIONS.................................................................................. 909 Door Lock Function.......................................................................................... 909 Map Lamp And Keyhole Illumination Function.................................................................. 910 Panic Alarm Function........................................................................................ 910 Remote Control Power Window Down (Open) Operation........................................................... 910 Key Reminder Function....................................................................................... 910 ENGINE STARTUP FUNCTION......................................................................................... 910 Operation Description....................................................................................... 910 Operation Range............................................................................................. 910 Active Check Function....................................................................................... 911 WARNING AND ALARM FUNCTION...................................................................................... 911 Operation Description....................................................................................... 911 Operation Condition......................................................................................... 911 Warning Procedure........................................................................................... 912 CHANGE SETTINGS FUNCTION........................................................................................ 914 Changing Settings With the Intelligent Key.................................................................. 914 Changing Settings Using CONSULT-II.......................................................................... 914 Changing Settings Using Display Unit........................................................................ 914 INTELLIGENT KEY REGISTRATION.................................................................................... 914 STEERING LOCK UNIT REGISTRATION................................................................................. 914 Steering Lock Unit ID Registration.......................................................................... 914 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 915 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 915 Schematic........................................................................................................... 916 Wiring Diagram — I/KEY—............................................................................................. 918 Terminals and Reference Value for INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT.............................................................. 931 Terminals and Reference Value for Steering Lock unit................................................................ 933 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM............................................................................... 933 Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R.......................................................................... 934 Diagnosis Procedure................................................................................................. 935 WORK FLOW....................................................................................................... 935 CONSULT-II Functions................................................................................................ 936 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..................................................................................... 936 BASIC OPERATION................................................................................................. 936 CONSULT-II Application Items........................................................................................ 937 WORK SUPPORT.................................................................................................... 937 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS......................................................................................... 937 DATA MONITOR.................................................................................................... 937 MAIN SIGNALS Display Item................................................................................... 937 ACTIVE TEST..................................................................................................... 938 List of Operation Related Parts..................................................................................... 939 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart..................................................................................... 940 ALL FUNCTIONS OF THE INTELLIGENT KEY ARE NOT OPERATING.......................................................... 940 REMOTE CONTROL ENTRY FUNCTION MALFUNCTION....................................................................... 940 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION MALFUNCTION.................................................................................. 941 ENGINE START FUNCTION MALFUNCTION............................................................................... 942 Intelligent Key Operation Inspection........................................................................ 942 Mechanical Key Operation Inspection......................................................................... 942 WARNING CHIME FUNCTION MALFUNCTION.............................................................................. 942 Check CAN Communication System Inspection........................................................................... 945 Check Intelligent Key Unit Power Supply and Ground Circuit.......................................................... 946 Check Key Switch (Intelligent Key Unit Input)....................................................................... 946 Check Key Switch (BCM Input)........................................................................................ 948 Check Ignition Knob Switch.......................................................................................... 949 Check Door Switch................................................................................................... 950 CHECK DOOR SWITCH (EXCEPT BACK DOOR SWITCH)..................................................................... 950 CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH.......................................................................................... 951 Check Unlock Sensor................................................................................................. 953 Check Door Request Switch........................................................................................... 954 Check Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer................................................................................ 956 Check Outside Key Antenna........................................................................................... 957 Check Inside Key Antenna............................................................................................ 960 Check Steering Lock Unit............................................................................................ 961 Check Stop Lamp Switch.............................................................................................. 963 Check Detention Switch.............................................................................................. 964 Check Select Unlock Relay........................................................................................... 966 Check Hazard Function............................................................................................... 967 Check Horn Function................................................................................................. 967 Check Headlamp Function............................................................................................. 967 Check IPDM E/R Operation............................................................................................ 967 Removal and Installation of Intelligent Key Unit.................................................................... 968 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 968 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 968 Intelligent Key Battery Replacement................................................................................. 969 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY INSPECTION.............................................................................. 969 DOOR.................................................................................................................... 970 Fitting Adjustment.................................................................................................. 970 FRONT DOOR...................................................................................................... 970 Longitudinal Clearance and Surface Height Adjustment at Front End........................................... 970 REAR DOOR....................................................................................................... 970 Longitudinal Clearance and Surface Height Adjustment at Front End........................................... 970 STRIKER ADJUSTMENT.............................................................................................. 971 Removal and Installation of Front Door.............................................................................. 971 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 971 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 972 Removal and Installation of Rear Door............................................................................... 972 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 972 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 973 Removal and Installation of Door Weatherstrip....................................................................... 973 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 973 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 973 FRONT DOOR LOCK......................................................................................................... 974 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 974 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 974 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 976 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................ 977 DOOR KEY CYLINDER ASSEMBLY...................................................................................... 977 REAR DOOR LOCK.......................................................................................................... 978 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 978 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 978 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 980 BACK DOOR............................................................................................................... 981 Fitting Adjustment.................................................................................................. 981 VERTICAL/LATERAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT........................................................................... 981 Back Door Assembly.................................................................................................. 981 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 981 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 982 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 982 Removal and Installation of Back Door Striker....................................................................... 982 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 982 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 982 Removal and Installation of Back Door Stay.......................................................................... 983 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 983 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 983 Removal and Installation of Dave Tail Male & Female................................................................. 983 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 983 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 984 Removal and Installation of Back Door Weatherstrip.................................................................. 984 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 984 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 984 BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY................................................................................................. 985 Removal and Installation of Back Door Lock & Closure Assembly....................................................... 985 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 985 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 985 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 985 Removal and Installation of Back Door Opener Switch................................................................. 985 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 985 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 986 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................ 986 BACK DOOR LOCK & CLOSURE ASSEMBLY............................................................................... 986 BACK DOOR AUTO CLOSURE SYSTEM........................................................................................... 987 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 987 System Description.................................................................................................. 987 CLOSE OPERATION................................................................................................. 987 NON-OPERATION CONDITION......................................................................................... 987 OPEN OPERATION.................................................................................................. 988 Wiring Diagram — B/CLOS —........................................................................................... 989 Terminals and Reference Value for Back Door Closure Control Unit.................................................... 991 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 992 Preliminary Check................................................................................................... 992 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom.................................................................................. 992 Back Door Closure Control Unit Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check................................................ 993 Half-Latch Switch Check............................................................................................. 993 Close Switch Check.................................................................................................. 995 Open Switch Check................................................................................................... 996 Back Door Opener Switch Check (With Intelligent Key)................................................................ 997 Back Door Opener Switch Check (Without Intelligent Key)............................................................. 999 Unlock Sensor Check (Without Intelligent Key).......................................................................1001 Closure Motor Check.................................................................................................1002 Removal and Installation of Back Door Closer Control Unit...........................................................1002 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM.................................................................................1003 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1003 System Description..................................................................................................1005 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1005 Operation Flow..............................................................................................1005 Setting the Vehicle Security System.........................................................................1005 Canceling the Set Vehicle Security System...................................................................1006 Canceling the Alarm Operation of the Vehicle Security System................................................1006 Activating the Alarm Operation of the Vehicle Security System...............................................1006 POWER SUPPLY....................................................................................................1006 INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM........................................................................1006 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION.........................................................................1007 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION............................................................................1007 PANIC ALARM OPERATION...........................................................................................1007 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................1008 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................1008 Schematic...........................................................................................................1009 Wiring Diagram -VEHSEC-.............................................................................................1010 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................1015 Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R..........................................................................1016 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................1017 CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEM.....................................................................................1018 Work Support................................................................................................1018 Data Monitor................................................................................................1018 Active Test.................................................................................................1019 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................1019 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................1019 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................1020 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart.....................................................................................1021 Diagnostic Procedure 1..............................................................................................1022 1 – 1 DOOR SWITCH CHECK.........................................................................................1022 1 – 2 HOOD SWITCH CHECK.........................................................................................1024 1 – 3 BACK DOOR SWITCH CHECK....................................................................................1026 Diagnostic Procedure 2..............................................................................................1028 SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK...................................................................................1028 Diagnostic Procedure 3..............................................................................................1029 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK............................................................................1029 Diagnostic Procedure 4..............................................................................................1029 VEHICLE SECURITY HORN ALARM CHECK...............................................................................1029 Diagnostic Procedure 5..............................................................................................1029 VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK...........................................................................1029 Diagnostic Procedure 6..............................................................................................1029 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK...............................................................................1029 IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS).........................................................................1030 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1030 System Description..................................................................................................1031 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1031 SECURITY INDICATOR..............................................................................................1031 Condition of Security Indicator.............................................................................1031 System Composition..................................................................................................1032 ECM Re-Communicating Function.......................................................................................1032 Wiring Diagram – NATS –.............................................................................................1033 MODELS WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM..............................................................................1033 MODELS WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM...........................................................................1035 Terminals and Reference Value for Steering Lock Unit/with Intelligent Key System....................................1036 Terminals and Reference Value for Intelligent Key Unit/with Intelligent Key System..................................1036 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................1037 CONSULT-II..........................................................................................................1038 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE.................................................................................1038 CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION........................................................................1039 HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.............................................................................1039 NATS SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART..........................................................................1040 Diagnosis Procedure.................................................................................................1041 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................1041 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart.....................................................................................1042 Security Indicator Inspection.......................................................................................1042 Diagnostic Procedure 1..............................................................................................1043 Diagnostic Procedure 2..............................................................................................1044 Diagnostic Procedure 3..............................................................................................1045 Diagnostic Procedure 4..............................................................................................1046 Diagnostic Procedure 5..............................................................................................1047 Diagnostic Procedure 6..............................................................................................1048 Diagnostic Procedure 7..............................................................................................1050 Removal and Installation NATS Antenna Amp...........................................................................1051 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1051 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1051 INTEGRATED HOMELINK TRANSMITTER.........................................................................................1052 Wiring Diagram —TRNSCV—.............................................................................................1052 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................................................................1053 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................1053 SYMPTOM: Transmitter Does Not Activate Receiver.............................................................1053 BODY REPAIR.............................................................................................................1055 Body Exterior Paint Color...........................................................................................1055 Body Component Parts................................................................................................1056 UNDERBODY COMPONENT PARTS.......................................................................................1056 BODY COMPONENT PARTS............................................................................................1058 Corrosion Protection................................................................................................1060 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1060 Anti-Corrosive Precoated Steel (Galvannealed Steel).........................................................1060 Phosphate Coating Treatment and Cationic Electrodeposition Primer...........................................1060 ANTI-CORROSIVE WAX..............................................................................................1061 UNDERCOATING....................................................................................................1062 Precautions in Undercoating.................................................................................1062 STONE GUARD COAT................................................................................................1063 Body Sealing........................................................................................................1064 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1064 Body Construction...................................................................................................1067 BODY CONSTRUCTION...............................................................................................1067 Body Alignment......................................................................................................1068 BODY CENTER MARKS...............................................................................................1068 PANEL PARTS MATCHING MARKS......................................................................................1069 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1070 ENGINE COMPARTMENT..............................................................................................1071 Measurement.................................................................................................1071 Measurement Points..........................................................................................1072 UNDERBODY.......................................................................................................1073 Measurement.................................................................................................1073 Measurement Points..........................................................................................1074 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT...........................................................................................1075 Measurement.................................................................................................1075 Measurement Points..........................................................................................1076 REAR BODY.......................................................................................................1077 Measurement.................................................................................................1077 Measurement Points..........................................................................................1078 Handling Precautions For Plastics...................................................................................1079 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PLASTICS...............................................................................1079 LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS......................................................................................1080 Precautions In Repairing High Strength Steel........................................................................1082 HIGH STRENGTH STEEL (HSS) USED IN NISSAN VEHICLES...............................................................1082 Read the Following Precautions When Repairing HSS:..........................................................1083 Replacement Operations..............................................................................................1085 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1085 HOODLEDGE.......................................................................................................1088 FRONT SIDE MEMBER...............................................................................................1090 FRONT SIDE MEMBER (PARTIAL REPLACEMENT).........................................................................1092 FRONT PILLAR....................................................................................................1094 CENTER PILLAR...................................................................................................1096 OUTER SILL......................................................................................................1098 REAR FENDER.....................................................................................................1100 REAR PANEL......................................................................................................1102 REAR END CROSSMEMBER............................................................................................1104 REAR FLOOR REAR.................................................................................................1106 REAR SIDE MEMBER EXTENSION......................................................................................1109 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 82 br..............................................................................................................................1112 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1112 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................1114 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................1114 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover...................................................................1114 Precautions for Brake System........................................................................................1114 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................1115 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................1115 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................1116 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................1116 BRAKE PEDAL.............................................................................................................1117 Inspection and Adjustment...........................................................................................1117 PLAY AND CLEARANCE BETWEEN BRAKE PEDAL AND FLOOR PANEL WITH PEDAL DEPRESSED.....................................1117 ADJUSTMENT......................................................................................................1118 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1118 COMPONENT PARTS LOCATION........................................................................................1118 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1119 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................1119 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1119 BRAKE FLUID.............................................................................................................1120 On-Board Inspection.................................................................................................1120 LEVEL CHECK.....................................................................................................1120 Drain and Refill....................................................................................................1120 Bleeding Brake System...............................................................................................1121 BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE...................................................................................................1122 Hydraulic Circuit...................................................................................................1122 Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping and Brake Hose.......................................................1122 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1122 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1122 Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose........................................................1123 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1123 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1123 Inspection After Installation.......................................................................................1123 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER...................................................................................................1124 On-Board Inspection.................................................................................................1124 LEAK INSPECTION.................................................................................................1124 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1124 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1124 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1124 Components..........................................................................................................1124 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................1125 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1125 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1125 BRAKE BOOSTER...........................................................................................................1126 On-Vehicle Service..................................................................................................1126 OPERATING CHECK.................................................................................................1126 AIRTIGHT CHECK..................................................................................................1126 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1127 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1127 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................1127 Output Rod Length Inspection................................................................................1127 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1128 VACUUM LINES............................................................................................................1129 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1129 Inspection..........................................................................................................1129 VISUAL INSPECTION...............................................................................................1129 CHECK VALVE INSPECTION..........................................................................................1130 Airtightness Inspection.....................................................................................1130 FRONT DISC BRAKE........................................................................................................1131 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................1131 PAD WEAR INSPECTION.............................................................................................1131 Components..........................................................................................................1131 Removal and Installation of Brake Pad...............................................................................1132 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1132 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1132 Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1132 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1132 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1132 Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1133 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1133 CALIPER INSPECTION..............................................................................................1134 Cylinder Body...............................................................................................1134 Torque Member...............................................................................................1134 Piston......................................................................................................1134 Sliding Pins and Sliding Pin Boots..........................................................................1134 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1134 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION...........................................................................................1135 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................1135 Runout Inspection...........................................................................................1135 Thickness Inspection........................................................................................1135 BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE......................................................................................1136 REAR DISC BRAKE.........................................................................................................1137 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................1137 PAD WEAR INSPECTION.............................................................................................1137 Components..........................................................................................................1137 Removal and Installation of Brake Pad...............................................................................1138 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1138 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1138 Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1138 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1138 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1139 Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1139 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1139 CALIPER INSPECTION..............................................................................................1140 Cylinder Body...............................................................................................1140 Torque Member...............................................................................................1140 Piston......................................................................................................1140 Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots.....................................................................1140 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1140 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION...........................................................................................1141 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................1141 Runout Inspection...........................................................................................1141 Thickness Inspection........................................................................................1142 BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE......................................................................................1142 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................1143 General Specifications..............................................................................................1143 Brake Pedal.........................................................................................................1143 Brake Booster.......................................................................................................1143 Check Valve.........................................................................................................1143 Front Disc Brake....................................................................................................1143 Rear Disc Brake.....................................................................................................1143 brc.............................................................................................................................1144 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1144 VDC/TCS/ABS.............................................................................................................1146 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1146 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1146 Precautions for Brake System....................................................................................1146 Precautions for Brake Control...................................................................................1146 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1148 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1148 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1148 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE..................................................................................................1149 Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position............................................................1149 Calibration of Decel G Sensor (AWD Model).......................................................................1149 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1151 System Diagram..................................................................................................1151 VDC Function....................................................................................................1151 TCS Function....................................................................................................1151 ABS Function....................................................................................................1151 EBD Function....................................................................................................1152 Fail-Safe Function..............................................................................................1152 VDC / TCS SYSTEM............................................................................................1152 ABS, EBD SYSTEM.............................................................................................1152 Hydraulic Circuit Diagram.......................................................................................1153 CAN COMMUNICATION...................................................................................................1154 System Description..............................................................................................1154 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................................1155 How to Proceed with Diagnosis...................................................................................1155 BASIC CONCEPT...............................................................................................1155 DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART.........................................................................................1156 ASKING COMPLAINTS...........................................................................................1157 EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET..................................................................................1157 Component Installation Location.................................................................................1158 Schematic.......................................................................................................1159 Wiring Diagram — VDC —..........................................................................................1160 Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard.......................................................................1166 REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II.............................................................................1166 CONSULT-II Functions............................................................................................1168 CONSULT-II MAIN FUNCTION....................................................................................1168 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE........................................................................1169 SELF-DIAGNOSIS..............................................................................................1170 Description.............................................................................................1170 Operation Procedure.....................................................................................1170 Display Item List.......................................................................................1171 DATA MONITOR................................................................................................1173 Operation Procedure.....................................................................................1173 Display Item List.......................................................................................1174 ACTIVE TEST.................................................................................................1176 Operation Procedure.....................................................................................1176 Solenoid Valve Operation Chart..........................................................................1176 ABS Motor...............................................................................................1177 For Fast and Accurate Diagnosis.................................................................................1178 PRECAUTIONS FOR DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................1178 ON and OFF Timing for ABS Warning Lamp, VDCOFF Indicator Lamp, SLIP Indicator Lamp, Brake Warnin.......1179 Basic Inspection................................................................................................1179 BASIC INSPECTION 1: BRAKE FLUID AMOUNT, LEAKS, AND BRAKE PADS INSPECTION....................................1179 BASIC INSPECTION 2: POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION..................................1179 BASIC INSPECTION 3: ABS WARNING LAMP, VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR LAMP and BRAKE WARNI...........1180 Inspection 1: Wheel Sensor Circuit..............................................................................1180 Inspection 2: Engine System.....................................................................................1182 Inspection 3: VDC/TCS/ABS Control Unit Circuit..................................................................1183 Inspection 4: Pressure Sensor Circuit...........................................................................1183 Inspection 5: Steering Angle Sensor Circuit.....................................................................1185 Inspection 6: Yaw Rate/Side G Sensor (2WD Model), Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G sensor (AWD Models) Circuit.............1187 Inspection 7: Solenoid and VDC Change-Over Valve Circuit........................................................1189 Inspection 8: Actuator Motor Circuit............................................................................1190 Inspection 9: ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Power Supply and Ground Circuit.....................1191 Inspection 10: Stop Lamp Switch Circuit.........................................................................1193 Inspection 11: Brake Fluid Level Switch Circuit.................................................................1194 Inspection 12: When “ST ANG SEN SIGNAL” Appears on Self-diagnosis Results Display...............................1195 Inspection 13: When “DECEL G SEN SET” Appears on Self-diagnostic Results Display (AWD Model)....................1195 Inspection 14: CAN Communication Circuit........................................................................1196 Component Inspection............................................................................................1196 VDC OFF SWITCH..............................................................................................1196 Symptom 1: Excessive ABS Function Operation Frequency...........................................................1196 Symptom 2: Unexpected Pedal Reaction............................................................................1197 Symptom 3: The Braking Distance is Long.........................................................................1197 Symptom 4: The ABS Function Does Not Operate....................................................................1198 Symptom 5: Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Sound Occurs........................................................1198 Symptom 6: Vehicle Jerks During VDC/TCS/ABS Control.............................................................1198 WHEEL SENSORS.......................................................................................................1200 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1200 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1200 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1200 SENSOR ROTOR........................................................................................................1202 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1202 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1202 Front...................................................................................................1202 Rear....................................................................................................1202 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1202 Front...................................................................................................1202 Rear....................................................................................................1202 ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)...............................................................................1203 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1203 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1203 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1203 G SENSOR............................................................................................................1205 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1205 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1205 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1205 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR...............................................................................................1206 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1206 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1206 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1206 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT........................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS.................................................................................................... 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)....................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)..................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX.................................................................................... 82 co..............................................................................................................................1208 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1208 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................1210 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1210 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1210 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................1210 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING............................................................................1210 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................1210 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1212 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1212 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1213 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS..........................................................................................1214 Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................1214 COOLING SYSTEM......................................................................................................1216 Cooling Circuit.................................................................................................1216 System Chart....................................................................................................1217 ENGINE COOLANT......................................................................................................1218 Inspection......................................................................................................1218 LEVEL CHECK.................................................................................................1218 LEAK CHECK..................................................................................................1218 Changing Engine Coolant.........................................................................................1218 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.....................................................................................1218 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT....................................................................................1219 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.....................................................................................1220 RADIATOR............................................................................................................1221 Components......................................................................................................1221 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1221 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1221 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1222 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1222 Checking Radiator Cap...........................................................................................1222 Checking Radiator...............................................................................................1223 RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE)............................................................................................1224 Components......................................................................................................1224 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................1224 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1224 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1224 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1225 INSPECTION..................................................................................................1227 COOLING FAN.........................................................................................................1228 Components......................................................................................................1228 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1228 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1228 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1228 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1228 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................1228 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1228 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................1228 Cooling Fan.............................................................................................1228 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1228 WATER PUMP..........................................................................................................1229 Components......................................................................................................1229 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1229 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1229 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1231 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1231 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1232 WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY.................................................................................1233 Components......................................................................................................1233 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1233 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1233 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1234 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1234 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1234 WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING.......................................................................................1235 Components......................................................................................................1235 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1235 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1235 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1236 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1236 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................1237 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................1237 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE).......................................................................1237 RADIATOR....................................................................................................1237 THERMOSTAT..................................................................................................1237 VK45DE..................................................................................................................1238 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1238 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1238 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1239 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1239 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1239 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS..........................................................................................1240 Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................1240 COOLING SYSTEM......................................................................................................1242 Cooling Circuit.................................................................................................1242 System Chart....................................................................................................1243 ENGINE COOLANT......................................................................................................1244 Inspection......................................................................................................1244 LEVEL CHECK.................................................................................................1244 LEAK CHECK..................................................................................................1244 Changing Engine Coolant.........................................................................................1244 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.....................................................................................1244 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT....................................................................................1245 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.....................................................................................1246 RADIATOR............................................................................................................1248 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1248 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1248 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1250 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1250 Checking Radiator Cap...........................................................................................1250 Checking Radiator...............................................................................................1251 RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE)............................................................................................1252 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................1252 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1252 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1252 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1253 INSPECTION..................................................................................................1255 COOLING FAN.........................................................................................................1256 Removal and Installation (Crankshaft Driven Type)...............................................................1256 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1256 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1256 Fan Coupling............................................................................................1256 Cooling Fan.............................................................................................1256 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1256 Removal and Installation (Motor Driven Type)....................................................................1257 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1257 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1257 Disassembly and Assembly (Motor Driven Type)....................................................................1257 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1257 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................1257 Cooling Fan.............................................................................................1257 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1257 WATER PUMP..........................................................................................................1258 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1258 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1258 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1259 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1259 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1259 THERMOSTAT AND WATER CONTROL VALVE..................................................................................1260 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1260 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1260 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1261 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1261 Thermostat and Water Control Valve......................................................................1261 Water Outlet Pipe and Heater Pipe.......................................................................1262 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1262 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................1263 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................1263 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE).......................................................................1263 RADIATOR....................................................................................................1263 THERMOSTAT..................................................................................................1263 WATER CONTROL VALVE.........................................................................................1263 di..............................................................................................................................1264 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1264 PRECAUTION..............................................................................................................1267 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................1267 COMBINATION METERS......................................................................................................1268 System Description..................................................................................................1268 UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT......................................................................................1268 Illumination Control........................................................................................1268 UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.......................................................................................1268 HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER....................................................................1269 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.................................................................................1269 SPEEDOMETER.....................................................................................................1270 TACHOMETER......................................................................................................1270 WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE.........................................................................................1270 FUEL GAUGE......................................................................................................1270 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1270 Arrangement of Combination Meter....................................................................................1271 Circuit Diagram.....................................................................................................1272 Wiring Diagram — METER —............................................................................................1273 Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter.................................................................1275 Terminals and Reference Value for Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................................1276 Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter............................................................................1277 SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.........................................................................................1277 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................1277 CONSULT-II Function (METER A/C AMP).................................................................................1277 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................1278 HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS................................................................................1278 PRELIMINARY CHECK...............................................................................................1278 Symptom Chart 1.....................................................................................................1280 Symptom Chart 2.....................................................................................................1280 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection..........................................................................1281 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection.....................................................................................1283 Engine Speed Signal Inspection......................................................................................1284 Engine Coolant Temperature Signal Inspection........................................................................1284 Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection.................................................................................1285 Odo/Trip Meter and Illumination Control Switch Inspection...........................................................1287 Fuel Gauge Pointer Fluctuates, Indicator Wrong Value or Varies......................................................1287 Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to FULL Position...........................................................................1287 Electrical Components Inspection....................................................................................1288 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT....................................................................................1288 Check Fuel Level Sensor Unit and Fuel Pump (Main)...........................................................1288 Check Fuel Level Sensor Unit and Pump (Main) Harness........................................................1288 Check Fuel Level Sensor Unit (Sub)..........................................................................1288 Removal and Installation of Combination Meter.......................................................................1288 Disassembly and Assembly of Combination Meter.......................................................................1289 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1289 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1290 Removal and Installation of Odo/Trip Meter and Illumination Control Switch..........................................1290 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1290 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1290 UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP...............................................................................................1291 System Description..................................................................................................1291 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS............................................................................................1291 Between Unified Meter & A/C amp. and Combination Meter......................................................1291 FAIL-SAFE.......................................................................................................1292 Solution When Communication Error Between the Unified Meter & A/C Amp. and the Combination Meter............1292 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................1292 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................1292 Schematic...........................................................................................................1293 CONSULT-II Function (METER A/C AMP).................................................................................1294 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................1294 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.........................................................................................1295 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1295 Display Item List...........................................................................................1295 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1295 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1295 Display Item List...........................................................................................1296 DTC [U1000] CAN Communication Circuit...............................................................................1297 DTC [B2202] Meter Communication Circuit.............................................................................1297 DTC [B2205] Vehicle Speed Circuit...................................................................................1300 Removal and Installation of Unified Meter and A/C Amp...............................................................1300 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1300 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1300 COMPASS.................................................................................................................1301 System Description..................................................................................................1301 DIRECTION DISPLAY...............................................................................................1301 Inaccurate Compass Direction................................................................................1302 Wiring Diagram – COMPAS –...........................................................................................1303 Removal and Installation of Compass.................................................................................1304 WARNING LAMPS...........................................................................................................1305 Schematic...........................................................................................................1305 Wiring Diagram — WARN —.............................................................................................1306 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stays Off (Ignition Switch ON)............................................................1314 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off (Oil Pressure Is Normal)................................................1315 Component Inspection................................................................................................1316 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH.............................................................................................1316 A/T INDICATOR...........................................................................................................1317 Wiring Diagram — AT/IND —...........................................................................................1317 A/T Indicator Is Malfunction........................................................................................1319 WARNING CHIME...........................................................................................................1321 System Description..................................................................................................1321 FUNCTION........................................................................................................1321 IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME (WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY)............................................................1321 IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME (WITH INTELLIGENT KEY)...............................................................1322 When Mechanical Key Is Used.................................................................................1322 When Intelligent Key Is Carried With The Driver.............................................................1322 LIGHT WARNING CHIME.............................................................................................1322 SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME.........................................................................................1322 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................1323 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................1323 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1324 Schematic...........................................................................................................1325 Wiring Diagram — CHIME —............................................................................................1326 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................1329 Terminals and Reference Value for Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................................1330 Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter.................................................................1330 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................1331 HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS................................................................................1331 PRELIMINARY CHECK...............................................................................................1331 Inspection for Power Supply and Ground Circuit..............................................................1331 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................1332 DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS DESCRIPTION....................................................................................1332 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................1332 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1333 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1333 Display Item List...........................................................................................1333 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................1333 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1333 Display Item List...........................................................................................1334 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.........................................................................................1334 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1334 Display Item List...........................................................................................1334 All Warnings Are Not Operated.......................................................................................1334 Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate)...................1335 Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Without Intelligent Key)........................................................1336 Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (With Intelligent Key, When Mechanical Key Is Used)..............................1338 Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (With Intelligent Key, When Intelligent Key Is Carried With Th...................1340 Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate................................................................................1342 Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate............................................................................1343 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM...........................................................................................1345 Precautions for Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system.................................................................1345 System Description..................................................................................................1345 LDW SYSTEM OPERATION............................................................................................1345 Warning Function............................................................................................1346 System Diagram..............................................................................................1347 Components Description......................................................................................1347 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.................................................................................1347 CAN Communication...................................................................................................1347 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..............................................................................................1347 CAN COMMUNICATION UNIT..........................................................................................1348 Action Test.........................................................................................................1348 LDW SYSTEM RUNNING TEST.........................................................................................1348 Function Check..............................................................................................1348 Camera Aiming Adjustment............................................................................................1349 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................1349 PREPARATION.....................................................................................................1349 TARGET SETTING..................................................................................................1349 Preparation Aiming Adjustment Jig...........................................................................1349 Target......................................................................................................1350 Target Setting..............................................................................................1351 VEHICLE HEIGHT CHECK............................................................................................1352 AIMING ADJUSTMENT...............................................................................................1352 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1352 Check After The Adjustment..................................................................................1355 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1356 Schematic...........................................................................................................1357 Wiring Diagram — LDW —..............................................................................................1358 Terminals and Reference Value for LDW Camera Unit...................................................................1361 CONSULT-II Function (LDW)...........................................................................................1361 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1361 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................1361 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................1362 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1362 Display Item................................................................................................1362 SELF-DIAG RESULTS...............................................................................................1362 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1362 Display Item................................................................................................1362 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1363 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1363 Monitored Item..............................................................................................1363 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................1364 Active Test Item............................................................................................1364 BUZZER DRIVE................................................................................................1364 SYSTEM ON LAMP DRIVE........................................................................................1365 INDICATOR LAMP DRIVE........................................................................................1365 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................1365 HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS................................................................................1365 SYMPTOM CHART...................................................................................................1365 Preliminary Inspection..............................................................................................1366 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection..........................................................................1367 DTC [C1B00] CAMERA UNIT MALF........................................................................................1367 DTC [C1B01] CAM AIMING INCMP........................................................................................1367 DTC [C1B02] VHCL SPD DATA MALF......................................................................................1368 DTC [C1B03] ABNRML TEMP DETECT......................................................................................1368 DTC [U1000] CAN COMM CIRCUIT........................................................................................1368 DTC [U1010] CONTROL UNIT (CAN)......................................................................................1368 LDW Chime Circuit Inspection........................................................................................1369 LDW Switch Circuit Inspection.......................................................................................1370 LDW Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection...............................................................................1372 Turn Signal Input Inspection........................................................................................1373 Removal and Installation for LDW Camera Unit........................................................................1374 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1374 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1374 Removal and Installation for LDW Chime..............................................................................1374 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1374 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1374 Removal and Installation for LDW Switch.............................................................................1374 CLOCK...................................................................................................................1375 Wiring Diagram — CLOCK —............................................................................................1375 Removal and Installation of Clock...................................................................................1376 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1376 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1376 REAR VIEW MONITOR.......................................................................................................1377 System Description..................................................................................................1377 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND.........................................................................................1377 AV COMMUNICATION LINE...........................................................................................1377 REAR VIEW CAMERA OPERATION......................................................................................1377 Side Distance Guideline.....................................................................................1377 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1378 Schematic...........................................................................................................1379 Wiring Diagram — R/VIEW —...........................................................................................1380 Terminals and Reference Value for Rear View Camera Control Unit.....................................................1383 CONSULT-II Function (REARVIEW CAMERA)...............................................................................1384 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................1384 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................1385 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1385 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1385 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1385 Display Item List...........................................................................................1385 Side Distance Guideline Correction..................................................................................1386 SIDE DISTANCE GUIDELINE CORRECTION PROCEDURE....................................................................1386 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection..........................................................................1388 Rear View Is Not Displayed With The A/T Selector Lever In R-Position................................................1389 The Rear View Image Is Distorted....................................................................................1393 Removal and Installation of Rear View Camera Control Unit...........................................................1394 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1394 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1394 Removal and Installation of Rear View Camera........................................................................1394 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1394 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1395 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 82 ec..............................................................................................................................1396 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1396 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................1410 INDEX FOR DTC.......................................................................................................1410 DTC No. Index...................................................................................................1410 Alphabetical Index..............................................................................................1414 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1418 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1418 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T..............................................................1418 Precaution......................................................................................................1418 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1422 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1422 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1424 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM...............................................................................................1425 System Diagram..................................................................................................1425 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System...........................................................................1426 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1426 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1426 VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION.......................................................1426 MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)........................................................1427 Open Loop Control.......................................................................................1427 MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL.........................................................................1427 FUEL INJECTION TIMING.......................................................................................1428 Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System..............................................................1428 Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System............................................................1428 FUEL SHUT-OFF...............................................................................................1428 Electronic Ignition (EI) System.................................................................................1428 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1428 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1428 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed).............................................................1429 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1429 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1429 AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL........................................................................................1430 Input/Output Signal Chart.......................................................................................1430 System Description..............................................................................................1430 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)...............................................................................1431 System Description..............................................................................................1431 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1431 BASIC ASCD SYSTEM...........................................................................................1431 SET OPERATION...............................................................................................1431 ACCEL OPERATION.............................................................................................1431 CANCEL OPERATION............................................................................................1431 COAST OPERATION.............................................................................................1431 RESUME OPERATION............................................................................................1432 Component Description...........................................................................................1432 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................1432 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................1432 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................1432 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1432 ASCD INDICATOR..............................................................................................1432 CAN COMMUNICATION...................................................................................................1433 System Description..............................................................................................1433 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM.........................................................................................1434 Description.....................................................................................................1434 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1434 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING...........................................................................1435 Component Inspection............................................................................................1437 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................1437 FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)..................................................1437 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1437 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1437 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................1437 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1437 EVAP SERVICE PORT...........................................................................................1438 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1438 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................1438 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................1438 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage................................................................................1438 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1439 WITHOUT CONSULT-II..........................................................................................1439 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)............................................................................1441 System Description..............................................................................................1441 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1442 SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.............................................................1442 SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING.....................1443 Component Inspection............................................................................................1444 REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE..............................................................................1444 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1444 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1445 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION......................................................................................1446 Description.....................................................................................................1446 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1446 Component Inspection............................................................................................1446 PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE..................................................................1446 PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE..................................................................................1447 IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS).....................................................................1448 Description.....................................................................................................1448 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM....................................................................................1449 Introduction....................................................................................................1449 Two Trip Detection Logic........................................................................................1449 Emission-Related Diagnostic Information.........................................................................1450 EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS...............................................................1450 DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC........................................................................................1453 How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC........................................................................1454 FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA............................................................1454 SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE............................................................................1455 SRT Item................................................................................................1456 SRT Set Timing..........................................................................................1456 SRT Service Procedure...................................................................................1457 How to Display SRT Status...............................................................................1458 How to Set SRT Code.....................................................................................1459 Driving Pattern.........................................................................................1460 TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II).........................................1461 HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION........................................................1463 How to Erase DTC........................................................................................1463 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)................................................................................1464 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1464 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION.........................................................................1465 MIL Flashing Without DTC................................................................................1465 HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE..........................................................................1465 How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results)............................................1465 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results)..........................................1466 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK.........................................................................1466 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING................................................................1466 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS...........................................................1466 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)..........................................1467 OBD System Operation Chart......................................................................................1467 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS...........................................1467 SUMMARY CHART...............................................................................................1468 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ” <EXHAUST QUALITY ...........1469 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION S...........1470 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................1470 <Driving Pattern C>.....................................................................................1470 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS............................................1471 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS............................................................................1472 <Driving Pattern A>.....................................................................................1472 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................1472 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE.............................................................................................1473 Basic Inspection................................................................................................1473 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check............................................................................1478 IDLE SPEED..................................................................................................1478 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1478 With GST................................................................................................1478 IGNITION TIMING.............................................................................................1478 Method A................................................................................................1478 Method B................................................................................................1478 Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment...................................................................................1480 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1480 OVERALL SEQUENCE............................................................................................1481 DETAILED PROCEDURE..........................................................................................1482 VIN Registration................................................................................................1491 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1491 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1491 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1491 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning....................................................................1491 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1491 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1491 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning.........................................................................1491 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1491 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1492 Idle Air Volume Learning........................................................................................1492 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1492 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1492 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1492 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1492 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1493 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE........................................................................................1494 Fuel Pressure Check.............................................................................................1494 FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE.......................................................................................1494 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1494 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1494 FUEL PRESSURE CHECK.........................................................................................1494 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................................1496 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction..................................................................................1496 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................1496 WORK FLOW...................................................................................................1497 Overall Sequence........................................................................................1497 Detailed Flow...........................................................................................1498 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET........................................................................................1500 Description.............................................................................................1500 Worksheet Sample........................................................................................1501 DTC Inspection Priority Chart...................................................................................1502 Fail-Safe Chart.................................................................................................1504 Symptom Matrix Chart............................................................................................1505 SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM........................................................................1505 SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER..........................................................................1507 Engine Control Component Parts Location.........................................................................1509 Vacuum Hose Drawing.............................................................................................1515 Circuit Diagram.................................................................................................1516 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout...........................................................................1518 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...............................................................................1518 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1518 ECM INSPECTION TABLE........................................................................................1518 CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)....................................................................................1527 FUNCTION....................................................................................................1527 ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION..................................................1528 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1529 WORK SUPPORT MODE...........................................................................................1530 Work Item...............................................................................................1530 SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE......................................................................................1531 Self Diagnostic Item....................................................................................1531 Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data........................................................1531 DATA MONITOR MODE...........................................................................................1532 Monitored Item..........................................................................................1532 DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE....................................................................................1536 Monitored Item..........................................................................................1536 ACTIVE TEST MODE............................................................................................1536 Test Item...............................................................................................1536 DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE.................................................................................1537 SRT STATUS Mode.........................................................................................1537 SRT Work Support Mode...................................................................................1537 DTC Work Support Mode...................................................................................1537 REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)...........................................1538 Description.............................................................................................1538 Operation...............................................................................................1539 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function................................................................................1539 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1539 FUNCTION....................................................................................................1540 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1540 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor......................................................................1542 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode...............................................................1546 CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1......................................................................1546 ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1.............................................1546 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE.............................................................................1548 Description.....................................................................................................1548 Testing Condition...............................................................................................1548 Inspection Procedure............................................................................................1548 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1549 OVERALL SEQUENCE............................................................................................1549 DETAILED PROCEDURE..........................................................................................1551 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT.........................................................................1558 Description.....................................................................................................1558 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1558 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.....................................................................................1559 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1559 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1560 Ground Inspection...............................................................................................1565 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE.............................................................................1566 Description.....................................................................................................1566 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1566 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1566 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1567 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1568 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL........................................................................................1569 Description.....................................................................................................1569 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1569 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1569 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1570 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1570 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1570 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1570 WITH GST....................................................................................................1571 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1571 Component Inspection............................................................................................1572 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................1572 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1572 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................1572 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER.........................................................................1573 Description.....................................................................................................1573 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1573 OPERATION...................................................................................................1573 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1573 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1573 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1574 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1574 WITH GST....................................................................................................1574 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1575 BANK 1......................................................................................................1575 BANK 2......................................................................................................1577 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1578 Component Inspection............................................................................................1580 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER...............................................................................1580 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1580 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1580 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR................................................................................................1581 Component Description...........................................................................................1581 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1581 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1581 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1582 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................1582 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1582 With GST................................................................................................1582 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1582 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1582 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1583 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1583 With GST................................................................................................1583 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1584 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1585 Component Inspection............................................................................................1588 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1588 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1588 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1588 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1589 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1589 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR.........................................................................................1590 Component Description...........................................................................................1590 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1590 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1590 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1590 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1591 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102.....................................................................................1591 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1591 With GST................................................................................................1591 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103.....................................................................................1591 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1591 With GST................................................................................................1591 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1592 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1593 Component Inspection............................................................................................1596 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1596 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1596 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1596 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1597 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1597 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR.........................................................................................1598 Component Description...........................................................................................1598 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1598 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1598 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1598 WITH GST....................................................................................................1599 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1600 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1601 Component Inspection............................................................................................1602 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................1602 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1602 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1602 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR.........................................................................................1603 Component Description...........................................................................................1603 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1603 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1603 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1604 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1604 WITH GST....................................................................................................1604 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1605 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1606 Component Inspection............................................................................................1607 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1607 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1607 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1607 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................1608 Component Description...........................................................................................1608 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1608 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1608 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1608 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1609 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1609 WITH GST....................................................................................................1609 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1610 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1611 Component Inspection............................................................................................1614 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................1614 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1614 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1614 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR................................................................................................1615 Component Description...........................................................................................1615 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1615 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1616 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1616 WITH GST....................................................................................................1616 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1616 Component Inspection............................................................................................1617 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1617 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1617 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1617 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR................................................................................................1618 Component Description...........................................................................................1618 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1618 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1618 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1618 WITH GST....................................................................................................1619 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1619 Component Inspection............................................................................................1620 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................1620 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1620 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1620 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION.......................................................................................1621 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1621 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1621 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1621 WITH GST....................................................................................................1621 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1621 Component Inspection............................................................................................1622 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1622 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1622 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1622 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2..............................................................................................1623 Component Description...........................................................................................1623 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1623 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1623 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1624 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1624 WITH GST....................................................................................................1624 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1625 BANK 1......................................................................................................1625 BANK 2......................................................................................................1627 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1628 Component Inspection............................................................................................1630 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1630 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1630 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1630 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1631 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1631 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2..............................................................................................1632 Component Description...........................................................................................1632 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1632 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1632 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1633 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1633 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1633 WITH GST....................................................................................................1633 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1635 BANK 1......................................................................................................1635 BANK 2......................................................................................................1637 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1638 Component Inspection............................................................................................1640 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1640 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1640 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1641 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1642 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1642 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................1643 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1643 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1643 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1643 WITH GST....................................................................................................1644 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1645 BANK 1......................................................................................................1645 BANK 2......................................................................................................1646 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1647 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................1653 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1653 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1653 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1653 WITH GST....................................................................................................1654 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1655 BANK 1......................................................................................................1655 BANK 2......................................................................................................1656 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1657 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR................................................................................................1662 Component Description...........................................................................................1662 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1662 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1662 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1662 WITH GST....................................................................................................1663 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1664 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1665 Component Inspection............................................................................................1666 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1666 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1667 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1667 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR.........................................................................................1668 Component Description...........................................................................................1668 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1668 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1668 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1668 WITH GST....................................................................................................1668 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1669 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1670 Component Inspection............................................................................................1671 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1671 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1672 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1672 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................1673 Component Description...........................................................................................1673 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1673 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1673 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1673 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1674 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1674 WITH GST....................................................................................................1674 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1675 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1676 Component Inspection............................................................................................1679 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................1679 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1679 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1679 DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE.............................................1680 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1680 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1680 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1681 WITH GST....................................................................................................1681 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1681 DTC P0327, P0328 KS.................................................................................................1690 Component Description...........................................................................................1690 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1690 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1690 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1690 WITH GST....................................................................................................1690 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1691 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1692 Component Inspection............................................................................................1693 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................1693 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1694 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................1694 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)..........................................................................................1695 Component Description...........................................................................................1695 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1695 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1695 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1695 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1696 WITH GST....................................................................................................1696 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1697 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1698 Component Inspection............................................................................................1701 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................1701 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1701 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................1701 DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE).................................................................................1702 Component Description...........................................................................................1702 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1702 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1702 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1702 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1702 WITH GST....................................................................................................1703 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1704 BANK 1......................................................................................................1704 BANK 2......................................................................................................1706 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1707 Component Inspection............................................................................................1710 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................1710 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1710 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................1710 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION........................................................................1711 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1711 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1711 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1711 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1712 WITH GST....................................................................................................1712 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1713 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1717 System Description..............................................................................................1717 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1717 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1717 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1718 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1718 WITH GST....................................................................................................1718 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1719 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1722 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1722 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1723 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1723 WITH GST....................................................................................................1723 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1724 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................1731 Description.....................................................................................................1731 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1731 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................1731 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1731 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1732 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1732 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1732 WITH GST....................................................................................................1732 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1733 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1735 Component Inspection............................................................................................1736 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1736 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1736 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1736 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1737 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1737 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................1738 Component Description...........................................................................................1738 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1738 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1738 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1739 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1739 WITH GST....................................................................................................1739 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1740 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1741 Component Inspection............................................................................................1743 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................1743 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1743 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1744 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................1745 Component Description...........................................................................................1745 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1745 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1745 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1746 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1746 WITH GST....................................................................................................1746 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1746 Component Inspection............................................................................................1747 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1747 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................1748 Component Description...........................................................................................1748 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1748 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1748 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1749 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1749 WITH GST....................................................................................................1749 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1750 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1751 Component Inspection............................................................................................1753 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1753 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................1754 Component Description...........................................................................................1754 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1754 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1754 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1755 With CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1755 With GST....................................................................................................1755 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1756 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1757 Component Inspection............................................................................................1761 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1761 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1762 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1762 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1763 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1763 WITH GST....................................................................................................1764 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1764 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1770 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1770 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1771 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1771 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1772 WITH GST....................................................................................................1772 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1773 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................1780 Component Description...........................................................................................1780 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1780 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1780 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1780 WITH GST....................................................................................................1780 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1781 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1781 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................1781 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................1782 Component Description...........................................................................................1782 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1782 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1782 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1782 WITH GST....................................................................................................1783 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1783 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1783 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................1783 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR..................................................................................1784 Component Description...........................................................................................1784 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1784 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1784 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1784 WITH GST....................................................................................................1784 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1785 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1785 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................1785 DTC P0500 VSS.......................................................................................................1786 Description.....................................................................................................1786 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1786 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1786 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1786 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1786 WITH GST....................................................................................................1787 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1787 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................1788 Description.....................................................................................................1788 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1788 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1788 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1788 WITH GST....................................................................................................1788 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1789 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................1790 Description.....................................................................................................1790 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1790 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1790 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1790 WITH GST....................................................................................................1790 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1791 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR................................................................................................1792 Component Description...........................................................................................1792 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1792 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1792 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1792 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1792 WITH GST....................................................................................................1792 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1793 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1794 Component Inspection............................................................................................1796 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................1796 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1796 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................1796 DTC P0605 ECM.......................................................................................................1797 Component Description...........................................................................................1797 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1797 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1797 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1797 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................1797 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1797 With GST................................................................................................1797 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1798 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1798 With GST................................................................................................1798 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................1798 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1798 With GST................................................................................................1798 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1798 DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER..................................................................1800 Description.....................................................................................................1800 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1800 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1800 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1800 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1800 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1800 WITH GST....................................................................................................1801 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1802 BANK 1......................................................................................................1802 BANK 2......................................................................................................1804 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1805 Component Inspection............................................................................................1807 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER........................................................................1807 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1807 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1807 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY..........................................................................................1808 Component Description...........................................................................................1808 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1808 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1808 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1808 WITH GST....................................................................................................1808 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1809 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1810 DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................................1812 Component Description...........................................................................................1812 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1812 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1812 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1812 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1812 WITH GST....................................................................................................1812 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1813 BANK 1......................................................................................................1813 BANK 2......................................................................................................1815 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1816 Component Inspection............................................................................................1817 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................1817 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1818 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................1818 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR........................................................................1819 Component Description...........................................................................................1819 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1819 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1819 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1819 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B...........................................................................1819 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1819 With GST................................................................................................1819 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................1820 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1820 With GST................................................................................................1820 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1820 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION........................................................................1821 Description.....................................................................................................1821 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1821 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1821 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1821 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1821 WITH GST....................................................................................................1821 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1822 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1823 Component Inspection............................................................................................1826 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................1826 Remove and Installation.........................................................................................1826 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1826 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY.......................................................................1827 Component Description...........................................................................................1827 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1827 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1827 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1827 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1827 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124.....................................................................................1827 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1827 With GST................................................................................................1828 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126.....................................................................................1828 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1828 With GST................................................................................................1828 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1829 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1830 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR....................................................................................1832 Component Description...........................................................................................1832 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1832 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1832 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1832 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1832 WITH GST....................................................................................................1832 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1833 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1834 Component Inspection............................................................................................1835 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................1835 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1836 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1836 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2..............................................................................................1837 Component Description...........................................................................................1837 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1837 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1837 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1838 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1838 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1838 WITH GST....................................................................................................1838 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1840 BANK 1......................................................................................................1840 BANK 2......................................................................................................1842 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1843 Component Inspection............................................................................................1845 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1845 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1845 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1846 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1847 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1847 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2..............................................................................................1848 Component Description...........................................................................................1848 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1848 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1848 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1849 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1849 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1849 WITH GST....................................................................................................1849 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1851 BANK 1......................................................................................................1851 BANK 2......................................................................................................1853 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1854 Component Inspection............................................................................................1856 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1856 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1856 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1857 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1858 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1858 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL................................................................................1859 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1859 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT..........................................................................................1860 Description.....................................................................................................1860 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1860 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1860 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1860 WITH GST....................................................................................................1860 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1860 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE....................................................................................1861 Description.....................................................................................................1861 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1861 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1861 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1861 WITH GST....................................................................................................1861 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1861 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE...................................................................................1862 Description.....................................................................................................1862 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1862 Cooling Fan Control.....................................................................................1862 Cooling Fan Operation...................................................................................1862 Cooling Fan Relay Operation.............................................................................1863 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................1863 Cooling Fan Motor.......................................................................................1863 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1864 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1864 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1864 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1865 WITH GST....................................................................................................1865 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1866 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1868 PROCEDURE A.................................................................................................1868 PROCEDURE B.................................................................................................1870 Main 12 Causes of Overheating...................................................................................1873 Component Inspection............................................................................................1873 COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2.................................................................................1873 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................1874 Component Description...........................................................................................1874 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1874 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1874 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1874 WITH GST....................................................................................................1874 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1875 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1875 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1875 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................1876 Component Description...........................................................................................1876 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1876 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1876 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1876 WITH GST....................................................................................................1876 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1877 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1877 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1877 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY.......................................................................................1878 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1878 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1878 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1878 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1878 WITH GST....................................................................................................1878 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1879 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1880 DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................1883 Component Description...........................................................................................1883 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1883 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1883 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1883 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1883 WITH GST....................................................................................................1884 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1885 BANK 1......................................................................................................1885 BANK 2......................................................................................................1887 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1888 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1891 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1891 DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................1892 Component Description...........................................................................................1892 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1892 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1892 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1892 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1892 WITH GST....................................................................................................1893 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1894 BANK 1......................................................................................................1894 BANK 2......................................................................................................1896 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1897 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1900 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1900 DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................1901 Component Description...........................................................................................1901 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1901 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1901 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1901 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1901 WITH GST....................................................................................................1902 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1903 BANK 1......................................................................................................1903 BANK 2......................................................................................................1905 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1906 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1910 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1910 DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................1911 Component Description...........................................................................................1911 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1911 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1911 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1911 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1911 WITH GST....................................................................................................1912 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1913 BANK 1......................................................................................................1913 BANK 2......................................................................................................1915 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1916 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1920 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1920 DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................1921 Component Description...........................................................................................1921 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1921 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1921 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1921 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1921 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1922 WITH GST....................................................................................................1922 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1924 BANK 1......................................................................................................1924 BANK 2......................................................................................................1926 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1927 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1930 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1930 DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................1931 Component Description...........................................................................................1931 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1931 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1931 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1932 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1932 WITH GST....................................................................................................1932 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1934 BANK 1......................................................................................................1934 BANK 2......................................................................................................1936 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1937 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1942 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1942 DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................1943 Component Description...........................................................................................1943 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1943 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1943 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1944 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1944 WITH GST....................................................................................................1944 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1946 BANK 1......................................................................................................1946 BANK 2......................................................................................................1948 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1949 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1954 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1954 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................1955 Description.....................................................................................................1955 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1955 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................1955 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1955 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1956 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1956 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1956 WITH GST....................................................................................................1956 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1957 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1959 Component Inspection............................................................................................1962 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1962 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1962 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1962 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1962 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1962 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................1963 Component Description...........................................................................................1963 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1963 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1963 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1964 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1964 WITH GST....................................................................................................1964 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1965 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1966 Component Inspection............................................................................................1967 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................1967 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1967 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1968 DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH.......................................................................................1969 Component Description...........................................................................................1969 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1969 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1969 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1969 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1970 WITH GST....................................................................................................1970 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1971 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1972 Component Inspection............................................................................................1975 ICC STEERING SWITCH.........................................................................................1975 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH......................................................................................1976 Component Description...........................................................................................1976 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1976 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1976 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1977 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1977 WITH GST....................................................................................................1977 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1978 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1979 Component Inspection............................................................................................1981 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................1981 DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION..............................................................................................1982 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1982 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1982 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1982 WITH GST....................................................................................................1982 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1982 DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH..........................................................................................1983 Component Description...........................................................................................1983 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1983 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1983 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1984 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1984 WITH GST....................................................................................................1984 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1985 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1986 Component Inspection............................................................................................1991 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................1991 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................1991 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................1991 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH.........................................................................................1992 Component Description...........................................................................................1992 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1992 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1992 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1993 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1993 WITH GST....................................................................................................1993 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1994 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1995 Component Inspection............................................................................................1999 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................1999 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................1999 DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR..................................................................................2000 Component Description...........................................................................................2000 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2000 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2000 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2000 WITH GST....................................................................................................2000 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2001 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.................................................................................2002 Component Description...........................................................................................2002 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2002 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2002 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2002 WITH GST....................................................................................................2002 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2003 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH................................................................................................2004 Component Description...........................................................................................2004 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2004 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2004 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2004 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2004 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2004 WITH GST....................................................................................................2005 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2006 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2007 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH..............................................................................................2009 Description.....................................................................................................2009 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2009 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2009 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2009 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2009 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2009 WITH GST....................................................................................................2009 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2010 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2011 Component Inspection............................................................................................2013 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2013 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................2014 Component Description...........................................................................................2014 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2014 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2014 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2014 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2015 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2015 WITH GST....................................................................................................2015 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2016 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2017 Component Inspection............................................................................................2019 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2019 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2020 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2020 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................2021 Component Description...........................................................................................2021 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2021 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2021 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2021 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2022 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2022 WITH GST....................................................................................................2022 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2023 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2024 Component Inspection............................................................................................2027 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2027 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2027 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2027 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................2028 Component Description...........................................................................................2028 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2028 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2028 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2028 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2029 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2029 WITH GST....................................................................................................2029 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2030 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2031 Component Inspection............................................................................................2034 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................2034 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2034 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2034 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR................................................................................................2035 Component Description...........................................................................................2035 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2035 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2035 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2035 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2036 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2036 WITH GST....................................................................................................2036 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2037 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2038 Component Inspection............................................................................................2042 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2042 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2042 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2042 IGNITION SIGNAL.....................................................................................................2043 Component Description...........................................................................................2043 IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR............................................................................2043 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2044 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2049 Component Inspection............................................................................................2054 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2054 CONDENSER...................................................................................................2055 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2055 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2055 INJECTOR CIRCUIT....................................................................................................2056 Component Description...........................................................................................2056 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2056 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2057 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2058 Component Inspection............................................................................................2062 INJECTOR....................................................................................................2062 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2062 INJECTOR....................................................................................................2062 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT...................................................................................................2063 Description.....................................................................................................2063 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2063 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2063 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2063 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2064 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2065 Component Inspection............................................................................................2067 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2067 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2068 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2068 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................................2069 Component Description...........................................................................................2069 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2070 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2071 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2073 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.................................................................................2073 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL..............................................................................................2074 Description.....................................................................................................2074 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2074 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2074 ICC BRAKE SWITCH....................................................................................................2075 Component Description...........................................................................................2075 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2075 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2076 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2077 Component Inspection............................................................................................2082 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................2082 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2082 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................2082 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...................................................................................................2083 Component Description...........................................................................................2083 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2083 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2084 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2085 Component Inspection............................................................................................2089 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2089 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2089 ASCD INDICATOR......................................................................................................2090 Component Description...........................................................................................2090 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2090 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2091 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2092 SNOW MODE SWITCH....................................................................................................2093 Description.....................................................................................................2093 CONSULT-II Reference Value in the Data Monitor Mode.............................................................2093 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2094 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2095 Component Inspection............................................................................................2097 SNOW MODE SWITCH............................................................................................2097 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR.........................................................................................2098 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2098 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................2100 Fuel Pressure...................................................................................................2100 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing..................................................................................2100 Calculated Load Value...........................................................................................2100 Mass Air Flow Sensor............................................................................................2100 Intake Air Temperature Sensor...................................................................................2100 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor...............................................................................2100 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater............................................................................2100 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater...................................................................................2100 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)................................................................................2100 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)................................................................................2100 Throttle Control Motor..........................................................................................2100 Injector........................................................................................................2101 Fuel Pump.......................................................................................................2101 VK45DE..................................................................................................................2102 INDEX FOR DTC.......................................................................................................2102 DTC No. Index...................................................................................................2102 Alphabetical Index..............................................................................................2106 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................2110 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................2110 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T..............................................................2110 Precaution......................................................................................................2110 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................2114 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................2114 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................2115 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM...............................................................................................2116 System Diagram..................................................................................................2116 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System...........................................................................2117 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2117 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2117 VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION.......................................................2117 MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)........................................................2118 Open Loop Control.......................................................................................2118 MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL.........................................................................2118 FUEL INJECTION TIMING.......................................................................................2119 Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System..............................................................2119 Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System............................................................2119 FUEL SHUT-OFF...............................................................................................2119 Electronic Ignition (EI) System.................................................................................2119 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2119 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2119 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed).............................................................2120 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2120 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2120 AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL........................................................................................2121 Input/Output Signal Chart.......................................................................................2121 System Description..............................................................................................2121 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)...............................................................................2122 System Description..............................................................................................2122 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2122 BASIC ASCD SYSTEM...........................................................................................2122 SET OPERATION...............................................................................................2122 ACCEL OPERATION.............................................................................................2122 CANCEL OPERATION............................................................................................2122 COAST OPERATION.............................................................................................2123 RESUME OPERATION............................................................................................2123 Component Description...........................................................................................2123 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................2123 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2123 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2123 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2123 ASCD INDICATOR..............................................................................................2123 CAN COMMUNICATION...................................................................................................2124 System Description..............................................................................................2124 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM.........................................................................................2125 Description.....................................................................................................2125 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2125 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING...........................................................................2126 Component Inspection............................................................................................2128 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................2128 FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)..................................................2128 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2128 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2128 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2128 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2128 EVAP SERVICE PORT...........................................................................................2129 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2129 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................2129 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2129 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage................................................................................2129 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2130 WITHOUT CONSULT-II..........................................................................................2130 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)............................................................................2132 System Description..............................................................................................2132 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2133 SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.............................................................2133 SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING.....................2134 Component Inspection............................................................................................2135 REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE..............................................................................2135 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2135 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2136 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION......................................................................................2137 Description.....................................................................................................2137 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2137 Component Inspection............................................................................................2137 PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE..................................................................2137 PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE..................................................................................2138 IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS).....................................................................2139 Description.....................................................................................................2139 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM....................................................................................2140 Introduction....................................................................................................2140 Two Trip Detection Logic........................................................................................2140 Emission-Related Diagnostic Information.........................................................................2141 EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS...............................................................2141 DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC........................................................................................2145 How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC........................................................................2145 FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA............................................................2146 SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE............................................................................2146 SRT Item................................................................................................2146 SRT Set Timing..........................................................................................2147 SRT Service Procedure...................................................................................2148 How to Display SRT Status...............................................................................2149 How to Set SRT Code.....................................................................................2150 Driving Pattern.........................................................................................2151 TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II).........................................2152 HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION........................................................2153 How to Erase DTC........................................................................................2153 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)................................................................................2155 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2155 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION.........................................................................2156 MIL Flashing Without DTC................................................................................2156 HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE..........................................................................2157 How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)............................................2157 How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor).....................................2157 How to Switch Monitored Sensor From Bank 1 to Bank 2 or Vice Versa......................................2157 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)..........................................2158 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK.........................................................................2158 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING................................................................2158 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS...........................................................2158 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results)..........................................2158 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR....................................................2159 OBD System Operation Chart......................................................................................2159 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS...........................................2159 SUMMARY CHART...............................................................................................2159 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ” <EXHAUST QUALITY ...........2160 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION S...........2161 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................2161 <Driving Pattern C>.....................................................................................2161 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS............................................2162 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS............................................................................2163 <Driving Pattern A>.....................................................................................2163 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................2163 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE.............................................................................................2164 Basic Inspection................................................................................................2164 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check............................................................................2169 IDLE SPEED..................................................................................................2169 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2169 With GST................................................................................................2169 IGNITION TIMING.............................................................................................2169 Method A................................................................................................2169 Method B................................................................................................2169 Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment...................................................................................2170 PREPARATION.................................................................................................2170 OVERALL SEQUENCE............................................................................................2171 DETAILED PROCEDURE..........................................................................................2172 VIN Registration................................................................................................2181 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2181 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2181 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2181 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning....................................................................2181 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2181 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2181 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning.........................................................................2181 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2181 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2182 Idle Air Volume Learning........................................................................................2182 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2182 PREPARATION.................................................................................................2182 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2182 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2182 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2183 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE........................................................................................2184 Fuel Pressure Check.............................................................................................2184 FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE.......................................................................................2184 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2184 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2184 FUEL PRESSURE CHECK.........................................................................................2184 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................................2186 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction..................................................................................2186 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................2186 WORK FLOW...................................................................................................2187 Overall Sequence........................................................................................2187 Detailed Flow...........................................................................................2188 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET........................................................................................2190 Description.............................................................................................2190 Worksheet Sample........................................................................................2191 DTC Inspection Priority Chart...................................................................................2192 Fail-Safe Chart.................................................................................................2194 Symptom Matrix Chart............................................................................................2195 SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM........................................................................2195 SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER..........................................................................2196 Engine Control Component Parts Location.........................................................................2199 Vacuum Hose Drawing.............................................................................................2205 Circuit Diagram.................................................................................................2206 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout...........................................................................2208 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...............................................................................2208 PREPARATION.................................................................................................2208 ECM INSPECTION TABLE........................................................................................2208 CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)....................................................................................2217 FUNCTION....................................................................................................2217 ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION..................................................2218 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................2219 WORK SUPPORT MODE...........................................................................................2220 Work Item...............................................................................................2220 SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE......................................................................................2221 Self Diagnostic Item....................................................................................2221 Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data........................................................2221 DATA MONITOR MODE...........................................................................................2222 Monitored Item..........................................................................................2222 DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE....................................................................................2226 Monitored Item..........................................................................................2226 ACTIVE TEST MODE............................................................................................2226 Test Item...............................................................................................2226 DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE.................................................................................2227 SRT STATUS Mode.........................................................................................2227 SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode...................................................................................2227 DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode...................................................................................2228 REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)...........................................2229 Description.............................................................................................2229 Operation...............................................................................................2230 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function................................................................................2230 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2230 FUNCTION....................................................................................................2231 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................2231 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor......................................................................2233 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode...............................................................2237 CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1......................................................................2237 ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1.................................2237 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE.............................................................................2239 Description.....................................................................................................2239 Testing Condition...............................................................................................2239 Inspection Procedure............................................................................................2239 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2240 OVERALL SEQUENCE............................................................................................2240 DETAILED PROCEDURE..........................................................................................2242 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT.........................................................................2249 Description.....................................................................................................2249 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2249 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.....................................................................................2250 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2250 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2251 Ground Inspection...............................................................................................2256 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE.............................................................................2257 Description.....................................................................................................2257 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2257 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2257 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2258 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2259 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL........................................................................................2260 Description.....................................................................................................2260 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2260 COMPONENT INSPECTION........................................................................................2260 Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve..............................................................2260 Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor.............................................................2261 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2261 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2261 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2261 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2262 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2262 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2262 With GST................................................................................................2262 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2262 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2262 With GST................................................................................................2262 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2263 BANK 1......................................................................................................2263 BANK 2......................................................................................................2265 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2266 Component Inspection............................................................................................2270 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2270 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2271 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2271 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2271 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2271 DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER.........................................................................2272 Description.....................................................................................................2272 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2272 OPERATION...................................................................................................2272 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2272 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2272 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2273 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2273 WITH GST....................................................................................................2273 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2274 BANK 1......................................................................................................2274 BANK 2......................................................................................................2276 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2277 Component Inspection............................................................................................2279 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER...............................................................................2279 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2279 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2279 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER.........................................................................2280 Description.....................................................................................................2280 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2280 OPERATION...................................................................................................2280 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2280 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2280 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2281 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2281 WITH GST....................................................................................................2281 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2282 BANK 1......................................................................................................2282 BANK 2......................................................................................................2284 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2285 Component Inspection............................................................................................2287 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER...............................................................................2287 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2287 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2287 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR................................................................................................2288 Component Description...........................................................................................2288 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2288 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2288 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2289 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2289 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2289 With GST................................................................................................2289 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2289 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2289 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2290 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2290 With GST................................................................................................2290 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2291 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2292 Component Inspection............................................................................................2295 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2295 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2295 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2295 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2296 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2296 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR.........................................................................................2297 Component Description...........................................................................................2297 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2297 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2297 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2297 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2298 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102.....................................................................................2298 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2298 With GST................................................................................................2298 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103.....................................................................................2298 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2298 With GST................................................................................................2298 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2299 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2300 Component Inspection............................................................................................2302 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2302 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2302 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2303 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2303 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2303 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR.........................................................................................2304 Component Description...........................................................................................2304 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2304 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2304 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2304 WITH GST....................................................................................................2305 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2306 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2307 Component Inspection............................................................................................2308 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................2308 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2308 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2308 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR.........................................................................................2309 Component Description...........................................................................................2309 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2309 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2309 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2310 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2310 WITH GST....................................................................................................2310 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2311 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2312 Component Inspection............................................................................................2314 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2314 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2314 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2314 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................2315 Component Description...........................................................................................2315 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2315 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2315 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2315 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2316 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2316 WITH GST....................................................................................................2316 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2317 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2318 Component Inspection............................................................................................2321 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................2321 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2321 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2321 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR................................................................................................2322 Component Description...........................................................................................2322 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2322 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2323 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2323 WITH GST....................................................................................................2323 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2323 Component Inspection............................................................................................2324 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2324 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2324 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2324 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR................................................................................................2325 Component Description...........................................................................................2325 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2325 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2325 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2325 WITH GST....................................................................................................2326 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2326 Component Inspection............................................................................................2327 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................2327 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2327 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2327 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION.......................................................................................2328 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2328 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2328 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2328 WITH GST....................................................................................................2328 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2328 Component Inspection............................................................................................2329 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2329 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2329 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2329 DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1..............................................................................................2330 Component Description...........................................................................................2330 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2330 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2330 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2331 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2331 WITH GST....................................................................................................2331 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2332 BANK 1......................................................................................................2332 BANK 2......................................................................................................2334 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2335 Component Inspection............................................................................................2337 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2337 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2337 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2338 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2338 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2338 DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1..............................................................................................2339 Component Description...........................................................................................2339 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2339 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2339 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2340 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2340 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2341 WITH GST....................................................................................................2341 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2342 BANK 1......................................................................................................2342 BANK 2......................................................................................................2344 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2345 Component Inspection............................................................................................2349 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2349 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2349 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2350 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2350 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2350 DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1..............................................................................................2351 Component Description...........................................................................................2351 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2351 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2351 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2352 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2352 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2353 WITH GST....................................................................................................2353 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2354 BANK 1......................................................................................................2354 BANK 2......................................................................................................2356 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2357 Component Inspection............................................................................................2359 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2359 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2359 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2359 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2360 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2360 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2..............................................................................................2361 Component Description...........................................................................................2361 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2361 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2361 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2362 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2362 WITH GST....................................................................................................2362 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2363 BANK 1......................................................................................................2363 BANK 2......................................................................................................2365 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2366 Component Inspection............................................................................................2368 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2368 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2368 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2369 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2369 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2369 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2..............................................................................................2370 Component Description...........................................................................................2370 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2370 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2370 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2371 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2371 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2371 WITH GST....................................................................................................2371 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2373 BANK 1......................................................................................................2373 BANK 2......................................................................................................2375 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2376 Component Inspection............................................................................................2379 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2379 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2379 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2380 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2380 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2380 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................2381 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2381 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2381 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2381 WITH GST....................................................................................................2382 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2383 BANK 1......................................................................................................2383 BANK 2......................................................................................................2384 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2385 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................2390 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2390 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2390 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2390 WITH GST....................................................................................................2391 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2392 BANK 1......................................................................................................2392 BANK 2......................................................................................................2393 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2394 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR................................................................................................2399 Component Description...........................................................................................2399 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2399 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2399 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2399 WITH GST....................................................................................................2400 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2401 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2402 Component Inspection............................................................................................2404 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2404 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2404 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2404 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR.........................................................................................2405 Component Description...........................................................................................2405 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2405 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2405 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2405 WITH GST....................................................................................................2405 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2406 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2407 Component Inspection............................................................................................2409 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2409 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2409 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2409 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................2410 Component Description...........................................................................................2410 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2410 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2410 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2410 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2411 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2411 WITH GST....................................................................................................2411 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2412 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2413 Component Inspection............................................................................................2416 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................2416 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2416 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2416 DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE.............................................2417 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2417 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2418 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2418 WITH GST....................................................................................................2418 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2419 DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS...................................................................................2426 Component Description...........................................................................................2426 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2426 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2426 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2426 WITH GST....................................................................................................2426 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2427 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2428 Component Inspection............................................................................................2430 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................2430 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2430 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................2430 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)..........................................................................................2431 Component Description...........................................................................................2431 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2431 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2431 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2432 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2432 WITH GST....................................................................................................2432 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2433 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2434 Component Inspection............................................................................................2437 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................2437 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2437 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................2437 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE)....................................................................2438 Component Description...........................................................................................2438 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2438 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2439 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2439 WITH GST....................................................................................................2439 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2440 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2441 Component Inspection............................................................................................2444 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................2444 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2444 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................2444 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION........................................................................2445 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2445 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2445 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2445 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2446 WITH GST....................................................................................................2446 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2447 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2451 System Description..............................................................................................2451 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2451 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2451 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2452 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2452 WITH GST....................................................................................................2452 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2453 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2456 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2456 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2457 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2457 WITH GST....................................................................................................2458 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2458 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................2464 Description.....................................................................................................2464 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2464 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2464 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2464 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2465 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2465 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2465 WITH GST....................................................................................................2465 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2466 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2468 Component Inspection............................................................................................2469 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2469 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2469 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2469 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2470 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2470 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................2471 Component Description...........................................................................................2471 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2471 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2471 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2472 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2472 WITH GST....................................................................................................2472 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2473 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2474 Component Inspection............................................................................................2476 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2476 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2476 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2477 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................2478 Component Description...........................................................................................2478 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2478 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2478 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2479 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2479 WITH GST....................................................................................................2479 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2479 Component Inspection............................................................................................2480 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2480 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................2481 Component Description...........................................................................................2481 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2481 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2481 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2482 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2482 WITH GST....................................................................................................2482 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2483 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2484 Component Inspection............................................................................................2486 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2486 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................2487 Component Description...........................................................................................2487 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2487 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2487 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2488 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2488 WITH GST....................................................................................................2488 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2489 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2490 Component Inspection............................................................................................2494 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2494 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2495 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2495 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2496 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2496 WITH GST....................................................................................................2497 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2497 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2503 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2503 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2504 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2504 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2505 WITH GST....................................................................................................2505 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2506 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................2512 Component Description...........................................................................................2512 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2512 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2512 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2512 WITH GST....................................................................................................2512 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2513 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2513 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................2513 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................2514 Component Description...........................................................................................2514 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2514 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2514 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2514 WITH GST....................................................................................................2515 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2515 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2515 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................2515 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT..........................................................................2516 Component Description...........................................................................................2516 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2516 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2516 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2516 WITH GST....................................................................................................2516 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2517 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2517 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................2517 DTC P0500 VSS.......................................................................................................2518 Description.....................................................................................................2518 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2518 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2518 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2518 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2519 WITH GST....................................................................................................2519 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2519 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................2520 Description.....................................................................................................2520 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2520 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2520 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2520 WITH GST....................................................................................................2520 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2521 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................2522 Description.....................................................................................................2522 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2522 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2522 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2522 WITH GST....................................................................................................2522 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2523 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR................................................................................................2524 Component Description...........................................................................................2524 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2524 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2524 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2524 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2524 WITH GST....................................................................................................2524 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2525 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2526 Component Inspection............................................................................................2528 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................2528 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2528 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................2528 DTC P0605 ECM.......................................................................................................2529 Component Description...........................................................................................2529 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2529 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2529 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2529 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2529 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2529 With GST................................................................................................2529 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2530 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2530 With GST................................................................................................2530 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................2530 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2530 With GST................................................................................................2530 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2530 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY..........................................................................................2532 Component Description...........................................................................................2532 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2532 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2532 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2532 WITH GST....................................................................................................2532 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2533 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2534 DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................................2536 Component Description...........................................................................................2536 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2536 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2536 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2536 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2536 WITH GST....................................................................................................2536 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2537 BANK 1......................................................................................................2537 BANK 2......................................................................................................2539 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2540 Component Inspection............................................................................................2542 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2542 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2542 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2542 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR........................................................................2543 Component Description...........................................................................................2543 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2543 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2543 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2543 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B...........................................................................2543 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2543 With GST................................................................................................2543 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................2544 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2544 With GST................................................................................................2544 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2544 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION........................................................................2545 Description.....................................................................................................2545 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2545 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2545 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2545 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2545 WITH GST....................................................................................................2545 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2546 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2547 Component Inspection............................................................................................2550 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................2550 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2550 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2550 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY.......................................................................2551 Component Description...........................................................................................2551 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2551 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2551 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2551 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2551 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124.....................................................................................2551 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2551 With GST................................................................................................2552 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126.....................................................................................2552 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2552 With GST................................................................................................2552 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2553 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2554 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR....................................................................................2556 Component Description...........................................................................................2556 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2556 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2556 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2556 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2556 WITH GST....................................................................................................2556 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2557 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2558 Component Inspection............................................................................................2559 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................2559 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2560 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2560 DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR........................................................................2561 Component Description...........................................................................................2561 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2561 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2561 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2561 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2561 WITH GST....................................................................................................2561 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2562 BANK 1......................................................................................................2562 BANK 2......................................................................................................2564 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2565 Component Inspection............................................................................................2568 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2568 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2568 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2568 DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1..............................................................................................2569 Component Description...........................................................................................2569 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2569 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2569 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2570 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2570 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2571 WITH GST....................................................................................................2571 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2571 Component Inspection............................................................................................2573 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2573 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2573 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2574 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2574 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2574 DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1..............................................................................................2575 Component Description...........................................................................................2575 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2575 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2575 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2576 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2576 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2577 WITH GST....................................................................................................2577 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2577 Component Inspection............................................................................................2579 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2579 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2579 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2580 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2581 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2581 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2..............................................................................................2582 Component Description...........................................................................................2582 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2582 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2582 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2583 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2583 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2583 WITH GST....................................................................................................2583 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2585 BANK 1......................................................................................................2585 BANK 2......................................................................................................2587 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2588 Component Inspection............................................................................................2591 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2591 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2591 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2592 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2592 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2592 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2..............................................................................................2593 Component Description...........................................................................................2593 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2593 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2593 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2594 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2594 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2594 WITH GST....................................................................................................2594 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2596 BANK 1......................................................................................................2596 BANK 2......................................................................................................2598 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2599 Component Inspection............................................................................................2602 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2602 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2602 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2603 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2603 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2603 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL................................................................................2604 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2604 DTC Confirmation Procedure (Up To Serial 400595 Except for Serial 400590).......................................2604 WITH CONSULT-ll.............................................................................................2604 DTC Confirmation Procedure (For Serial 400590 and From Serial 400596)...........................................2605 WITH CONSULT-ll.............................................................................................2605 WITH GST....................................................................................................2605 Overall Function Check (Up To Serial 400595 Except for Serial 400590)...........................................2605 WITH GST....................................................................................................2605 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2605 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT..........................................................................................2606 Description.....................................................................................................2606 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2606 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2606 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2606 WITH GST....................................................................................................2606 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2606 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE....................................................................................2607 Description.....................................................................................................2607 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2607 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2607 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2607 WITH GST....................................................................................................2607 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2607 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE...................................................................................2608 Description.....................................................................................................2608 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2608 Cooling Fan Control.....................................................................................2608 Cooling Fan Operation...................................................................................2608 Cooling Fan Relay Operation.............................................................................2609 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2609 Cooling Fan Motor.......................................................................................2609 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2609 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2609 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2610 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2610 WITH GST....................................................................................................2610 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2612 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2614 PROCEDURE A.................................................................................................2616 PROCEDURE B.................................................................................................2618 Main 13 Causes of Overheating...................................................................................2618 Component Inspection............................................................................................2619 COOLING FAN MOTOR...........................................................................................2619 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................2620 Component Description...........................................................................................2620 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2620 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2620 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2620 WITH GST....................................................................................................2620 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2621 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2621 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2621 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................2622 Component Description...........................................................................................2622 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2622 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2622 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2622 WITH GST....................................................................................................2622 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2623 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2623 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2623 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY.......................................................................................2624 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2624 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2624 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2624 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2624 WITH GST....................................................................................................2624 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2625 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2626 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................2628 Description.....................................................................................................2628 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2628 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2628 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2628 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2629 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2629 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2629 WITH GST....................................................................................................2629 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2630 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2632 Component Inspection............................................................................................2635 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2635 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2635 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2635 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2635 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2635 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................2636 Component Description...........................................................................................2636 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2636 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2636 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2637 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2637 WITH GST....................................................................................................2637 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2638 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2639 Component Inspection............................................................................................2640 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2640 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2640 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2641 DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH.......................................................................................2642 Component Description...........................................................................................2642 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2642 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2642 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2643 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2643 WITH GST....................................................................................................2643 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2644 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2645 Component Inspection............................................................................................2648 ICC STEERING SWITCH.........................................................................................2648 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH......................................................................................2649 Component Description...........................................................................................2649 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2649 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2649 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2650 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2650 WITH GST....................................................................................................2650 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2651 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2652 Component Inspection............................................................................................2655 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................2655 DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION..............................................................................................2656 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2656 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2656 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2656 WITH GST....................................................................................................2656 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2656 DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH..........................................................................................2657 Component Description...........................................................................................2657 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2657 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2657 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2658 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2658 WITH GST....................................................................................................2658 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2659 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2660 Component Inspection............................................................................................2665 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................2665 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2665 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................2665 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH.........................................................................................2666 Component Description...........................................................................................2666 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2666 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2666 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2667 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2667 WITH GST....................................................................................................2667 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2668 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2669 Component Inspection............................................................................................2673 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2673 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2673 DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR..................................................................................2674 Component Description...........................................................................................2674 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2674 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2674 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2674 WITH GST....................................................................................................2674 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2675 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.................................................................................2676 Component Description...........................................................................................2676 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2676 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2676 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2676 WITH GST....................................................................................................2676 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2677 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH................................................................................................2678 Component Description...........................................................................................2678 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2678 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2678 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2678 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2678 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2679 WITH GST....................................................................................................2679 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2680 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2681 DTC P1720 VSS.......................................................................................................2683 Description.....................................................................................................2683 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2683 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2683 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2683 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2683 WITH GST....................................................................................................2683 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2684 DTC P1780 SHIFT CHANGE SIGNAL.......................................................................................2685 Description.....................................................................................................2685 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2685 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2685 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2685 WITH GST....................................................................................................2685 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2685 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...............................................................................2687 Component Description...........................................................................................2687 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2687 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2687 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2687 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2687 WITH GST....................................................................................................2687 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2688 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2689 Component Inspection............................................................................................2690 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................2690 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2690 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2690 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2691 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................2691 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH..............................................................................................2692 Description.....................................................................................................2692 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2692 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2692 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2692 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2692 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2692 WITH GST....................................................................................................2692 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2693 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2694 Component Inspection............................................................................................2696 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2696 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................2697 Component Description...........................................................................................2697 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2697 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2697 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2697 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2698 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2698 WITH GST....................................................................................................2698 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2699 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2700 Component Inspection............................................................................................2702 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2702 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2703 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2703 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................2704 Component Description...........................................................................................2704 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2704 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2704 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2704 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2705 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2705 WITH GST....................................................................................................2705 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2706 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2707 Component Inspection............................................................................................2710 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2710 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2710 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2710 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................2711 Component Description...........................................................................................2711 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2711 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2711 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2711 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2712 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2712 WITH GST....................................................................................................2712 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2713 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2714 Component Inspection............................................................................................2717 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................2717 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2717 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2717 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR................................................................................................2718 Component Description...........................................................................................2718 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2718 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2718 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2718 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2719 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2719 WITH GST....................................................................................................2719 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2720 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2721 Component Inspection............................................................................................2725 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2725 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2725 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2725 VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)........................................................................2726 Description.....................................................................................................2726 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2726 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2727 Power Valve.............................................................................................2727 VIAS Control Solenoid Valve.............................................................................2727 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2727 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2728 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2729 Component Inspection............................................................................................2732 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................2732 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2732 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2733 VACUUM TANK.................................................................................................2733 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2733 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................2733 IGNITION SIGNAL.....................................................................................................2734 Component Description...........................................................................................2734 IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR............................................................................2734 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2735 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2740 Component Inspection............................................................................................2744 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2744 CONDENSER...................................................................................................2745 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2745 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2745 INJECTOR CIRCUIT....................................................................................................2746 Component Description...........................................................................................2746 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2746 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2747 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2748 Component Inspection............................................................................................2752 INJECTOR....................................................................................................2752 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2752 INJECTOR....................................................................................................2752 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT...................................................................................................2753 Description.....................................................................................................2753 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2753 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2753 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2753 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2754 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2755 Component Inspection............................................................................................2758 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2758 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2758 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2758 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................................2759 Component Description...........................................................................................2759 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2760 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2761 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2763 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.................................................................................2763 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL..............................................................................................2764 Description.....................................................................................................2764 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2764 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2764 ICC BRAKE SWITCH....................................................................................................2765 Component Description...........................................................................................2765 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2765 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2766 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2767 Component Inspection............................................................................................2772 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................2772 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2772 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................2772 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...................................................................................................2773 Component Description...........................................................................................2773 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2773 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2774 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2775 Component Inspection............................................................................................2779 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2779 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2779 ASCD INDICATOR......................................................................................................2780 Component Description...........................................................................................2780 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2780 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2781 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2782 SNOW MODE SWITCH....................................................................................................2783 Description.....................................................................................................2783 CONSULT-II Reference Value in the Data Monitor Mode.............................................................2783 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2784 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2785 Component Inspection............................................................................................2787 SNOW MODE SWITCH............................................................................................2787 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR.........................................................................................2788 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2788 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................2790 Fuel Pressure...................................................................................................2790 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing..................................................................................2790 Calculated Load Value...........................................................................................2790 Mass Air Flow Sensor............................................................................................2790 Intake Air Temperature Sensor...................................................................................2790 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor...............................................................................2790 Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor....................................................................................2790 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)................................................................................2790 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)................................................................................2790 Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater...................................................................................2790 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater...................................................................................2791 Throttle Control Motor..........................................................................................2791 Injector........................................................................................................2791 Fuel Pump.......................................................................................................2791 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 82 ei..............................................................................................................................2792 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................2792 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................2794 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................2794 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover...................................................................2794 Precautions for Work................................................................................................2794 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................2795 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................2795 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................2795 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................2796 Work Flow...........................................................................................................2796 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................2796 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................2797 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................2797 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................2797 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................2797 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................2798 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................2798 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................2798 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................2798 DOORS...........................................................................................................2798 TRUNK...........................................................................................................2799 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................2799 SEATS...........................................................................................................2799 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................2799 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................2800 CLIP AND FASTENER.......................................................................................................2802 Clip and Fastener...................................................................................................2802 FRONT BUMPER............................................................................................................2805 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2805 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2806 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2807 Removal and Installation of Front Fillet Molding Assembly.......................................................2807 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2807 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2807 REAR BUMPER.............................................................................................................2808 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2808 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2809 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2810 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF REAY BUMPER FASCIA..................................................................2810 Disassembly.................................................................................................2810 Assembly....................................................................................................2811 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF REAR BUMPER CLOSING.................................................................2811 Removal.....................................................................................................2811 Installation................................................................................................2811 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF DRAFTER GUARD.......................................................................2811 Removal.....................................................................................................2811 Installation................................................................................................2811 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF REAR FILLET MOLDING ASSEMBLY........................................................2812 Removal.....................................................................................................2812 Installation................................................................................................2812 FRONT GRILLE............................................................................................................2813 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2813 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2813 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2813 COWL TOP................................................................................................................2814 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2814 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2814 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2814 FENDER PROTECTOR........................................................................................................2815 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2815 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2815 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2815 DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING....................................................................................................2816 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2816 FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING......................................................................................2816 Removal.....................................................................................................2816 Installation................................................................................................2816 REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING.......................................................................................2816 Removal.....................................................................................................2816 Installation................................................................................................2816 DOOR OUTSIDE LOWER MOLDING..............................................................................................2817 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2817 FRONT AND REAR DOOR OUTSIDE LOWER MOLDING.......................................................................2817 Removal.....................................................................................................2817 Installation................................................................................................2817 DOOR PARTING SEAL.......................................................................................................2818 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2818 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2818 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2818 CENTER MUD GUARD........................................................................................................2819 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2819 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2819 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2819 WINDSHIELD MOLDING......................................................................................................2820 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2820 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2820 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2820 BACK DOOR WINDOW MOLDING................................................................................................2821 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2821 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2821 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2821 ROOF SIDE MOLDING.......................................................................................................2823 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2823 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2823 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2823 ROOF RAIL...............................................................................................................2824 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2824 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2824 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2824 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF ROOF RAIL BRACKET...................................................................2824 Removal.....................................................................................................2824 Installation................................................................................................2824 DOOR FINISHER...........................................................................................................2825 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2825 DOOR FINISHER (FRONT AND REAR)..................................................................................2825 Removal.....................................................................................................2825 Installation................................................................................................2826 BODY SIDE TRIM..........................................................................................................2827 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2827 CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH.....................................................................................2827 Removal.....................................................................................................2827 Installation................................................................................................2828 CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH.....................................................................................2828 Removal.....................................................................................................2828 Installation................................................................................................2828 DASH SIDE FINISHER..............................................................................................2828 Removal.....................................................................................................2828 Installation................................................................................................2828 FRONT PILLAR GARNISH............................................................................................2829 Removal.....................................................................................................2829 Installation................................................................................................2829 KICKING PLATE...................................................................................................2829 Removal.....................................................................................................2829 Installation................................................................................................2829 CENTER MUDGUARD FINISHER (FRONT/REAR)...........................................................................2829 Removal.....................................................................................................2829 Installation................................................................................................2829 FLOOR TRIM..............................................................................................................2830 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2830 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2830 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2831 HEADLINING..............................................................................................................2832 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2832 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2833 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2833 LUGGAGE FLOOR TRIM......................................................................................................2834 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2834 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2835 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2835 BACK DOOR TRIM..........................................................................................................2836 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2836 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2836 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2836 BACK DOOR OUTSIDE FINISHER......................................................................................2836 Removal and Installation....................................................................................2836 em..............................................................................................................................2838 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................2838 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................2842 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................2842 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect......................................2842 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2842 Precautions for Drain Engine Coolant and Engine Oil.............................................................2842 Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping.......................................................................2842 Precautions for Removal and Disassembly.........................................................................2842 Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement..............................................................2842 Precautions for Assembly and Installation.......................................................................2843 Precautions for Angle Tightening................................................................................2843 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................2843 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING............................................................................2843 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................2843 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................2845 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................2845 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................2847 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................2850 NVH Troubleshooting — Engine Noise..............................................................................2850 Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom...................................................2851 DRIVE BELTS.........................................................................................................2852 Checking Drive Belts............................................................................................2852 Tension Adjustment..............................................................................................2852 ALTERNATOR AND POWER STEERING OIL PUMP BELT.................................................................2853 A/C COMPRESSOR BELT.........................................................................................2853 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2853 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2853 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2853 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT............................................................................................2854 Components......................................................................................................2854 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2854 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2854 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2854 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2855 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.....................................................................................2855 INSPECTION..................................................................................................2855 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2855 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2855 INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR...........................................................................................2856 Components......................................................................................................2856 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2856 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2856 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2858 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2858 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2859 Part Installation Direction.............................................................................2859 Intake Manifold Collector (Lower).......................................................................2859 Intake Manifold Collector (Upper).......................................................................2859 Water Hose..............................................................................................2859 Electric Throttle Control Actuator......................................................................2860 INTAKE MANIFOLD.....................................................................................................2861 Components......................................................................................................2861 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2861 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2861 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2862 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2862 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2862 Intake Manifold.........................................................................................2862 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST.............................................................................2863 Components......................................................................................................2863 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2863 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2863 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2865 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2865 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2865 Exhaust Manifold Gasket.................................................................................2865 Exhaust Manifold........................................................................................2865 Air Fuel Ratio Sensor and Heated Oxygen Sensor..........................................................2866 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER............................................................................................2867 Components (2WD Model)..........................................................................................2867 Removal and Installation (2WD Model)............................................................................2867 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2867 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2869 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2869 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2872 Components (AWD Model)..........................................................................................2872 Removal and Installation (AWD Model)............................................................................2873 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2873 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2875 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2875 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2878 IGNITION COIL.......................................................................................................2879 Components......................................................................................................2879 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2879 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2879 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2879 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)...................................................................................2880 Components......................................................................................................2880 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2880 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2880 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2880 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2881 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE.........................................................................................2882 Components......................................................................................................2882 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2882 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2882 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2884 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2887 Check on Fuel Leakage...................................................................................2887 ROCKER COVER........................................................................................................2888 Components......................................................................................................2888 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2888 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2888 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2889 FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE.............................................................................................2891 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2891 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2891 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2895 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2900 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2900 TIMING CHAIN........................................................................................................2901 Components......................................................................................................2901 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2902 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2902 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2909 Timing Chain............................................................................................2909 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2910 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2919 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2919 CAMSHAFT............................................................................................................2921 Components......................................................................................................2921 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2922 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2922 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2923 Camshaft Runout.........................................................................................2923 Camshaft Cam Height.....................................................................................2923 Camshaft Journal Oil Clearance..........................................................................2923 Camshaft End Play.......................................................................................2924 Camshaft Sprocket Runout................................................................................2924 Valve Lifter............................................................................................2925 Valve Lifter Clearance..................................................................................2925 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2926 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2929 Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove........................................................2929 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2929 Valve Clearance.................................................................................................2930 INSPECTION..................................................................................................2930 ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................................2933 OIL SEAL............................................................................................................2934 Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal......................................................................2934 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2934 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2934 Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal......................................................................2935 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2935 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2935 Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal.......................................................................2935 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2935 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2936 CYLINDER HEAD.......................................................................................................2937 On-Vehicle Service..............................................................................................2937 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE...............................................................................2937 Components......................................................................................................2938 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2938 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2938 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2939 Cylinder Head Bolts Outer Diameter......................................................................2939 Cylinder Head Distortion................................................................................2939 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2940 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2941 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2941 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................2942 COMPONENTS..................................................................................................2942 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................2942 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................2943 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................2944 VALVE DIMENSIONS............................................................................................2944 VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE.......................................................................................2944 Valve Stem Diameter.....................................................................................2944 Valve Guide Inner Diameter..............................................................................2944 Valve Guide Clearance...................................................................................2945 VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT.....................................................................................2945 VALVE SEAT CONTACT..........................................................................................2946 VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT......................................................................................2946 VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS.....................................................................................2947 VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD......................................................2948 ENGINE ASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................2949 Components (2WD Model)..........................................................................................2949 Removal and Installation (2WD Model)............................................................................2949 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2950 Outline.................................................................................................2950 Preparation.............................................................................................2950 Engine Room.............................................................................................2950 Passenger Room Side.....................................................................................2950 Vehicle Underbody.......................................................................................2951 Removal Work............................................................................................2951 Separation Work.........................................................................................2952 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2952 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2953 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2953 Components (AWD Model)..........................................................................................2954 Removal and Installation (AWD Model)............................................................................2954 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2955 Outline.................................................................................................2955 Preparation.............................................................................................2955 Engine Room.............................................................................................2955 Passenger Room Side.....................................................................................2955 Vehicle Underbody.......................................................................................2956 Removal Work............................................................................................2956 Separation Work.........................................................................................2957 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2957 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2958 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2958 CYLINDER BLOCK......................................................................................................2959 Components......................................................................................................2959 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................2960 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................2960 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................2965 How to Select Piston and Bearing................................................................................2972 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2972 HOW TO SELECT PISTON........................................................................................2972 When New Cylinder Block is Used.........................................................................2972 When Cylinder Block is Reused...........................................................................2972 Piston Selection Table..................................................................................2973 HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING........................................................................2973 When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used.........................................................2973 When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused...........................................................2973 Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table..................................................................2973 Undersize Bearings Usage Guide..........................................................................2973 HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING..................................................................................2974 When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used.........................................................2974 When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused...........................................................2974 Main Bearing Selection Table............................................................................2975 Main Bearing Grade Table (All Journals).................................................................2976 Undersize Bearing Usage Guide...........................................................................2976 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................2977 CRANKSHAFT END PLAY.........................................................................................2977 CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE...............................................................................2977 PISTON TO PISTON PIN OIL CLEARANCE..........................................................................2977 Piston Pin Hole Diameter................................................................................2977 Piston Pin Outer Diameter...............................................................................2977 Piston to Piston Pin Oil Clearance......................................................................2977 PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE..................................................................................2978 PISTON RING END GAP.........................................................................................2978 CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION.............................................................................2979 CONNECTING ROD BIG END DIAMETER.............................................................................2979 CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE........................................................................2979 Connecting Rod Bushing Inner Diameter...................................................................2979 Piston Pin Outer Diameter...............................................................................2980 Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance....................................................................2980 CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION...................................................................................2980 MAIN BEARING HOUSING INNER DIAMETER.........................................................................2981 PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE...........................................................................2981 Cylinder Bore inner Diameter............................................................................2981 Piston Skirt Diameter...................................................................................2982 Piston-to-Cylinder Bore Clearance.......................................................................2982 Re-boring Cylinder Bore.................................................................................2982 CRANKSHAFT MAIN JOURNAL DIAMETER............................................................................2982 CRANKSHAFT PIN JOURNAL DIAMETER.............................................................................2983 CRANKSHAFT OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER...........................................................................2983 CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT...........................................................................................2983 CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE........................................................................2983 Method by Calculation...................................................................................2983 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................2984 MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE..................................................................................2984 Method by Calculation...................................................................................2984 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................2984 MAIN BEARING CRUSH HEIGHT...................................................................................2985 CONNECTING ROD BEARING CRUSH HEIGHT.........................................................................2985 MAIN BEARING CAP BOLT OUTER DIAMETER........................................................................2985 CONNECTING ROD BOLT OUTER DIAMETER..........................................................................2986 DRIVE PLATE.................................................................................................2986 OIL JET.....................................................................................................2986 OIL JET RELIEF VALVE........................................................................................2986 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................2987 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................2987 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................2987 DRIVE BELT..................................................................................................2988 INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR, INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD.............................................2988 SPARK PLUG..................................................................................................2988 CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING...............................................................................2989 Valve Lifter............................................................................................2989 Valve Clearance.........................................................................................2989 Available Valve Lifter..................................................................................2990 CYLINDER HEAD...............................................................................................2991 Valve Dimensions........................................................................................2991 Valve Guide.............................................................................................2992 Valve Seat..............................................................................................2993 Valve Spring............................................................................................2993 CYLINDER BLOCK..............................................................................................2994 PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN..........................................................................2995 Available Piston........................................................................................2995 Piston Ring.............................................................................................2995 Piston Pin..............................................................................................2995 CONNECTING ROD..............................................................................................2996 CRANKSHAFT..................................................................................................2997 MAIN BEARING................................................................................................2998 Undersize...............................................................................................2998 Main Bearing Oil Clearance..............................................................................2998 CONNECTING ROD BEARING......................................................................................2999 Undersize...............................................................................................2999 Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance....................................................................2999 VK45DE..................................................................................................................3000 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3000 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect......................................3000 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................3000 Precautions for Drain Engine Coolant and Engine Oil.............................................................3000 Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping.......................................................................3000 Precautions for Removal and Disassembly.........................................................................3000 Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement..............................................................3000 Precautions for Assembly and Installation.......................................................................3000 Parts Requiring Angle Tightening................................................................................3001 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................3001 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING............................................................................3001 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................3001 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3003 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................3003 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3005 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................3007 NVH Troubleshooting — Engine Noise..............................................................................3007 Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom...................................................3008 ENGINE ROOM COVER...................................................................................................3009 Components......................................................................................................3009 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3009 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3009 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3009 DRIVE BELTS.........................................................................................................3010 Components......................................................................................................3010 Checking Drive Belts............................................................................................3010 Tension Adjustment..............................................................................................3010 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3010 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3010 Alternator, Water Pump and A/C Compressor Belt..........................................................3010 Power Steering Oil Pump Belt............................................................................3011 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3011 Components......................................................................................................3012 Drive Belt Auto Tensioner and Idler Pulley......................................................................3012 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3012 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3012 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT............................................................................................3013 Components......................................................................................................3013 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3013 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3013 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3014 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3014 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.....................................................................................3014 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3014 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3014 INTAKE MANIFOLD.....................................................................................................3015 Components......................................................................................................3015 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3016 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3016 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3017 Surface Distortion......................................................................................3017 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3017 Intake Manifold (Lower).................................................................................3017 Intake Manifold (Upper).................................................................................3017 Electric Throttle Control Actuator......................................................................3018 Water Hose..............................................................................................3018 Vacuum Hose.............................................................................................3018 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3018 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST.............................................................................3019 Components......................................................................................................3019 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3019 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3019 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3021 Surface Distortion......................................................................................3021 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3021 Exhaust Manifold Gasket.................................................................................3021 Exhaust Manifold........................................................................................3021 Heated Oxygen Sensor....................................................................................3021 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER............................................................................................3022 Components......................................................................................................3022 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3022 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3022 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3024 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3024 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3025 IGNITION COIL.......................................................................................................3026 Components......................................................................................................3026 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3026 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3026 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3026 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)...................................................................................3027 Components......................................................................................................3027 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3027 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3027 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3027 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3028 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE.........................................................................................3029 Components......................................................................................................3029 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3029 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3029 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3031 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3033 Check on Fuel Leakage...................................................................................3033 ROCKER COVER........................................................................................................3034 Components......................................................................................................3034 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3034 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3034 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3036 TIMING CHAIN........................................................................................................3037 Components......................................................................................................3037 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3038 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3038 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3042 Timing Chain............................................................................................3042 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3042 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3048 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................3048 CAMSHAFT............................................................................................................3049 Components......................................................................................................3049 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3049 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3049 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3050 Camshaft Runout.........................................................................................3050 Camshaft Cam Height.....................................................................................3051 Camshaft Journal Oil Clearance..........................................................................3051 Camshaft End Play.......................................................................................3052 Camshaft Sprocket Runout................................................................................3052 Valve Lifter and Adjusting Shim.........................................................................3052 Valve Lifter Clearance..................................................................................3053 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3053 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3055 Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove........................................................3055 Valve Clearance.................................................................................................3056 INSPECTION..................................................................................................3056 ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................................3059 OIL SEAL............................................................................................................3062 Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal......................................................................3062 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3062 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3062 Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal......................................................................3063 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3063 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3063 Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal.......................................................................3064 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3064 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3064 CYLINDER HEAD.......................................................................................................3066 On-Vehicle Service..............................................................................................3066 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE...............................................................................3066 Components......................................................................................................3067 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3067 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3067 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3068 Cylinder Head Bolts Outer Diameter......................................................................3068 Cylinder Head Distortion................................................................................3068 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3068 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................3070 COMPONENTS..................................................................................................3070 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3070 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3071 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................3072 VALVE DIMENSIONS............................................................................................3072 VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE.......................................................................................3073 Valve Stem Diameter.....................................................................................3073 Valve Guide Inner Diameter..............................................................................3073 Valve Guide Clearance...................................................................................3073 VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT.....................................................................................3073 VALVE SEAT CONTACT..........................................................................................3075 VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT......................................................................................3075 VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS.....................................................................................3076 VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD......................................................3076 ENGINE ASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3077 Components......................................................................................................3077 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3077 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3077 Outline.................................................................................................3077 Preparation.............................................................................................3078 Engine Room LH..........................................................................................3078 Engine Room RH..........................................................................................3078 Vehicle Underbody.......................................................................................3078 Removal Work............................................................................................3079 Separation Work.........................................................................................3080 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3080 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3080 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................3080 CYLINDER BLOCK......................................................................................................3082 Components......................................................................................................3082 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................3083 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3083 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3086 How to Select Piston and Bearing................................................................................3092 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................3092 HOW TO SELECT PISTON........................................................................................3092 When New Cylinder Block is Used:........................................................................3092 When Cylinder Block is Reused:..........................................................................3093 Piston Selection Table..................................................................................3093 HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING........................................................................3093 When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used:........................................................3093 When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused:..........................................................3093 Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table..................................................................3093 Under Size Bearings Usage Guide.........................................................................3094 HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING..................................................................................3094 When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used:........................................................3094 When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused:..........................................................3095 Main Bearing Selection Table (No. 1 and 5 Journal)......................................................3096 Main Bearing Selection Table (No. 2, 3 and 4 Journal)...................................................3097 Main Bearing Grade Table (All Journals).................................................................3098 Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide.......................................................................3098 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................3099 CRANKSHAFT END PLAY.........................................................................................3099 CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE...............................................................................3099 PISTON TO PISTON PIN OIL CLEARANCE..........................................................................3099 Piston Pin Hole Diameter................................................................................3099 Piston Pin Outer Diameter...............................................................................3099 Piston to Piston Pin Oil Clearance......................................................................3099 PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE..................................................................................3100 PISTON RING END GAP.........................................................................................3100 CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION.............................................................................3101 CONNECTING ROD BIG END DIAMETER.............................................................................3101 CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE........................................................................3101 Connecting Rod Bushing Inner Diameter...................................................................3101 Piston Pin Outer Diameter...............................................................................3102 Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance....................................................................3102 CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION...................................................................................3102 MAIN BEARING HOUSING INNER DIAMETER.........................................................................3103 PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE...........................................................................3103 Cylinder Bore Inner Diameter............................................................................3103 Piston Skirt Diameter...................................................................................3104 Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance.......................................................................3104 Re-boring Cylinder Bore.................................................................................3104 CRANKSHAFT MAIN JOURNAL DIAMETER............................................................................3104 CRANKSHAFT PIN JOURNAL DIAMETER.............................................................................3105 CRANKSHAFT OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER...........................................................................3105 CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT...........................................................................................3105 CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE........................................................................3106 Method by Calculation...................................................................................3106 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................3106 MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE..................................................................................3107 Method by Calculation...................................................................................3107 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................3107 CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING................................................................................3108 CRUSH HEIGHT OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING......................................................................3108 DRIVE PLATE.................................................................................................3108 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................3109 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................3109 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................3109 DRIVE BELTS.................................................................................................3109 INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD........................................................................3109 SPARK PLUG..................................................................................................3110 CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING...............................................................................3110 Valve Lifter............................................................................................3110 Valve Clearance.........................................................................................3110 Available Adjusting Shims...............................................................................3111 CYLINDER HEAD...............................................................................................3112 Valve Dimensions........................................................................................3113 Valve Guide.............................................................................................3113 Valve Seat..............................................................................................3114 Valve Spring............................................................................................3114 CYLINDER BLOCK..............................................................................................3115 PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN..........................................................................3116 Available Piston........................................................................................3116 Piston Ring.............................................................................................3116 Piston Pin..............................................................................................3116 CONNECTING ROD..............................................................................................3117 CRANKSHAFT..................................................................................................3118 MAIN BEARING................................................................................................3120 Undersize...............................................................................................3120 Main Bearing Oil Clearance..............................................................................3121 CONNECTING ROD BEARING......................................................................................3121 Undersize...............................................................................................3121 Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance....................................................................3121 ex..............................................................................................................................3122 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3122 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3123 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3123 EXHAUST SYSTEM..........................................................................................................3124 Checking Exhaust System.............................................................................................3124 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3124 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3125 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3125 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3126 fax.............................................................................................................................3128 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3128 2WD.....................................................................................................................3129 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3129 Special Service Tools (SST).....................................................................................3129 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3129 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................3130 NVH Troubleshooting Chart.......................................................................................3130 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE.........................................................................................3131 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...............................................................................3131 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION....................................................................................3131 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3131 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3131 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3132 Ball Joint Inspection...................................................................................3132 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3132 SERVICE DATA........................................................................................................3133 Wheel Bearing...................................................................................................3133 AWD.....................................................................................................................3134 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3134 Caution.........................................................................................................3134 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3135 Special Service Tools (SST).....................................................................................3135 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3135 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................3136 NVH Troubleshooting Chart.......................................................................................3136 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE.........................................................................................3137 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...............................................................................3137 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION....................................................................................3137 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3137 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3137 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3138 Ball Joint Inspection...................................................................................3138 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3138 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT...................................................................................................3139 Removal and Installation (Left Side)............................................................................3139 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3139 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3139 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3139 Removal and Installation (Right Side)...........................................................................3140 Removal.....................................................................................................3140 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3140 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3141 Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side)............................................................................3141 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3141 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3141 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3142 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................3142 Shaft...................................................................................................3142 Joint Sub-Assembly......................................................................................3142 Slide Joint Side........................................................................................3142 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3143 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3143 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3145 Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side)...........................................................................3147 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3147 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3147 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3148 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................3148 Shaft...................................................................................................3148 Joint Sub-Assembly......................................................................................3148 Slide Joint Side........................................................................................3148 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3149 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3149 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3151 SERVICE DATA........................................................................................................3153 Wheel Bearing...................................................................................................3153 Drive Shaft.....................................................................................................3153 Tightening Torque...............................................................................................3153 ffd.............................................................................................................................3154 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3154 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3155 Service Notice or Precautions.......................................................................................3155 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3156 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3156 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3158 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3159 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3159 DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................3160 Cross-Sectional View................................................................................................3160 DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL...................................................................................................3161 Changing Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................3161 DRAINING........................................................................................................3161 FILLING.........................................................................................................3161 Checking Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................3161 OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL.......................................................................................3161 FRONT OIL SEAL..........................................................................................................3162 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3162 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3162 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3163 SIDE OIL SEAL...........................................................................................................3164 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3164 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3164 Right Side:.................................................................................................3164 Left Side:..................................................................................................3164 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3164 Right Side:.................................................................................................3164 Left Side:..................................................................................................3164 FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3165 Removal and Installation (VQ35DE Models)............................................................................3165 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3165 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3165 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3165 Removal and Installation (VK45DE Models)............................................................................3167 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3167 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3167 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3167 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3169 COMPONENTS (VQ35DE MODELS)......................................................................................3169 COMPONENTS (VK45DE MODELS)......................................................................................3171 ASSEMBLY INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT..............................................................................3173 Total Preload Torque........................................................................................3173 Drive Gear Runout...........................................................................................3173 Tooth Contact...............................................................................................3174 Backlash....................................................................................................3176 Companion Flange Runout.....................................................................................3176 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3177 Side Shaft Assembly.........................................................................................3177 Differential Assembly.......................................................................................3177 Drive Pinion Assembly.......................................................................................3180 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3181 ADJUSTMENT AND SELECTION OF ADJUSTING WASHERS (SHIMS)...........................................................3182 Differential Side Gear Clearance............................................................................3182 Side Bearing Preload........................................................................................3182 Pinion Gear Height..........................................................................................3184 Pinion Bearing Preload......................................................................................3184 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3185 Drive Pinion Assembly.......................................................................................3185 Differential Assembly.......................................................................................3187 Side Shaft Assembly.........................................................................................3191 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3192 General Specifications..............................................................................................3192 Inspection and Adjustment...........................................................................................3192 DRIVE GEAR RUNOUT...............................................................................................3192 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE................................................................................3192 PRELOAD TORQUE..................................................................................................3192 BACKLASH........................................................................................................3192 COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT.........................................................................................3192 SELECTIVE PARTS.................................................................................................3192 Side Gear Thrust Washer.....................................................................................3192 Pinion Height Adjusting Washer..............................................................................3193 Drive Pinion Bearing Adjusting Washer.......................................................................3193 Drive Pinion Adjusting Washer...............................................................................3193 Side Bearing Adjusting Shim.................................................................................3193 Side Bearing Adjusting Washer...............................................................................3193 fl..............................................................................................................................3194 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3194 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3195 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3195 FUEL SYSTEM.............................................................................................................3196 Checking Fuel Lines.................................................................................................3196 General Precautions.................................................................................................3196 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY..............................................................3197 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3197 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3197 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3199 Main and Sub Fuel Level Sensor Unit.........................................................................3200 Quick Connector.............................................................................................3200 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3200 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3201 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3201 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3202 FUEL TANK...............................................................................................................3203 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3203 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3203 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3204 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3204 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3205 Standard and Limit..................................................................................................3205 FUEL TANK.......................................................................................................3205 fsu.............................................................................................................................3206 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3206 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3207 Caution.............................................................................................................3207 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3208 Special Service Tools (SST).........................................................................................3208 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3209 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3210 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3210 FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY...............................................................................................3211 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................3211 INSPECTION OF TRANSVERSE LINK BALL JOINT END PLAY...............................................................3211 STRUT INSPECTION................................................................................................3211 Wheel Alignment Inspection..........................................................................................3211 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3211 PRELIMINARY CHECK...............................................................................................3211 INSPECTION OF CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION ANGLES.....................................................3211 Using a CCK Gauge...........................................................................................3211 Toe-In Inspection...........................................................................................3212 Components..........................................................................................................3213 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3214 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3214 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3215 COIL SPRING AND STRUT...................................................................................................3216 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3216 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3216 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3216 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3217 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3217 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3217 Strut Inspection............................................................................................3217 Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Inspection..............................................................3217 Coil Spring Inspection......................................................................................3217 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3218 TRANSVERSE LINK.........................................................................................................3219 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3219 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3219 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3219 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................3219 Ball Joint Inspection.......................................................................................3219 Swing Torque Inspection.....................................................................................3220 Rotating Torque Inspection..................................................................................3220 Axial End Play Inspection...................................................................................3220 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3220 STABILIZER BAR..........................................................................................................3221 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3221 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3221 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3221 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3221 FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER.................................................................................................3222 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3222 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3222 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3222 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3222 SERVICE DATA............................................................................................................3223 Wheel Alignment (Unladen)...........................................................................................3223 Ball Joint..........................................................................................................3223 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*).........................................................................................3223 gi..............................................................................................................................3224 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3224 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3226 Description.........................................................................................................3226 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3226 Precautions for NVIS/IVIS (NISSAN/INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM - NATS) (If Equipped).........................3226 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect..........................................3227 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................3227 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover...................................................................3227 General Precautions.................................................................................................3227 Precautions for Three Way Catalyst..................................................................................3229 Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Recommended)........................................................3229 Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Required)...........................................................3230 Precautions for Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System............................................3230 Precautions for Hoses...............................................................................................3230 HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION...................................................................................3230 HOSE CLAMPING...................................................................................................3231 Precautions for Engine Oils.........................................................................................3231 HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS...................................................................................3231 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS............................................................................3231 Precautions for Air Conditioning....................................................................................3231 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL..................................................................................................3232 Description.........................................................................................................3232 Terms...............................................................................................................3232 Units...............................................................................................................3232 Contents............................................................................................................3232 Components..........................................................................................................3233 SYMBOLS.........................................................................................................3233 How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................................................3234 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3234 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..................................................................3234 HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION..............................................................3235 TYPE 1: Harness Wire Color and Connector Number are Shown in Illustration...................................3235 TYPE 2: Harness Wire Color and Connector Number are Shown in Text...........................................3236 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES............................................................3236 How to Read Wiring Diagrams.........................................................................................3238 CONNECTOR SYMBOLS...............................................................................................3238 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -................................................................................3239 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3240 Harness Indication..........................................................................................3242 Component Indication........................................................................................3242 Switch Positions............................................................................................3242 Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines...................................................................3243 Multiple Switch.............................................................................................3244 Reference Area..............................................................................................3245 Abbreviations.......................................................................................................3246 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT.............................................................................3247 How to Check Terminal...............................................................................................3247 CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT..................................................................................3247 HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS.........................................................................................3247 Probing from Harness Side...................................................................................3247 Probing from Terminal Side..................................................................................3247 How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal............................................................3248 Waterproof Connector Inspection.............................................................................3249 Terminal Lock Inspection....................................................................................3249 How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident.......................................................3250 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................3250 INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS.......................................................................................3250 Introduction................................................................................................3250 Vehicle Vibration...........................................................................................3251 Heat Sensitive..............................................................................................3252 Freezing....................................................................................................3252 Water Intrusion.............................................................................................3252 Electrical Load.............................................................................................3252 Cold or Hot Start Up........................................................................................3253 CIRCUIT INSPECTION..............................................................................................3253 Introduction................................................................................................3253 Testing for “Opens” in the Circuit..........................................................................3253 Testing for “Shorts” in the Circuit.........................................................................3254 Ground Inspection...........................................................................................3255 Voltage Drop Tests..........................................................................................3255 Control Unit Circuit Test...................................................................................3257 Control Units and Electrical Parts..................................................................................3258 PRECAUTIONS.....................................................................................................3258 CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM..............................................................................................3260 Description.........................................................................................................3260 Function and System Application.....................................................................................3260 Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement............................................................................3261 Checking Equipment..................................................................................................3261 CONSULT-II Start Procedure..........................................................................................3261 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit........................................................................3262 INSPECTION PROCEDURE............................................................................................3262 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................................................................................................3263 LIFTING POINT...........................................................................................................3264 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3264 Garage Jack and Safety Stand........................................................................................3264 2-Pole Lift.........................................................................................................3265 Board-On Lift.......................................................................................................3266 TOW TRUCK TOWING........................................................................................................3267 Tow Truck Towing....................................................................................................3267 2WD MODELS......................................................................................................3267 AWD MODELS......................................................................................................3268 Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a Stuck Vehicle)..........................................................................3268 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION..........................................................................................3269 TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS.....................................................................................3270 Tightening Torque Table.............................................................................................3270 RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS..............................................................................3271 Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants..........................................................................3271 IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION..............................................................................................3272 Model Variation.....................................................................................................3272 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER...........................................................................................3273 IDENTIFICATION PLATE............................................................................................3273 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER............................................................................................3274 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER...................................................................................3274 Dimensions..........................................................................................................3274 Wheels & Tires......................................................................................................3274 TERMINOLOGY.............................................................................................................3275 SAE J1930 Terminology List..........................................................................................3275 gw..............................................................................................................................3280 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3280 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3282 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3282 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover...................................................................3282 Handling for Adhesive and Primer....................................................................................3282 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3283 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3283 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3283 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................3284 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3284 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................3284 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................3285 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................3285 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................3285 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................3285 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................3286 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................3286 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................3286 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................3286 DOORS...........................................................................................................3286 TRUNK...........................................................................................................3287 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................3287 SEATS...........................................................................................................3287 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................3287 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................3288 WINDSHIELD GLASS........................................................................................................3290 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3290 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3290 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3291 Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield........................................................................3291 BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS..................................................................................................3292 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3292 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3292 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3293 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM.....................................................................................................3294 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3294 System Description..................................................................................................3295 WITH FRONT POWER WINDOW ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM.......................................................................3295 WITH FRONT AND REAR WINDOW ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM....................................................................3295 MANUAL OPERATION................................................................................................3296 Front Driver Side Door......................................................................................3296 Front Passenger Side Door...................................................................................3296 Rear Door (LH or RH) / With Front Power Window Anti-pinch System............................................3297 Rear Door (LH or RH) / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System...................................3298 AUTO OPERATION..................................................................................................3298 POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK........................................................................................3299 With Front Power Window Anti-pinch System...................................................................3299 With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System..........................................................3299 POWER WINDOW LOCK...............................................................................................3299 With Front Power Window Anti-pinch System...................................................................3299 With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System..........................................................3299 RETAINED POWER OPERATION........................................................................................3300 ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM...............................................................................................3300 POWER WINDOW CONTROL BY THE KEY CYLINDER SWITCH.................................................................3300 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3301 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3301 Schematic/With Front Power Window Anti-Pinch System.................................................................3302 Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —/With Front Power Window Anti-Pinch System.................................................3303 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM / With Front Power Window Anti-Pinch System....................................3307 Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window Main Switch / With Front Power Window Anti-pinch Sy...................3308 Terminal and Reference Value for Front Power Window Switch (Passenger Side) / With Front Power Wi...................3309 Schematic/With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-Pinch System........................................................3310 Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —/With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-Pinch System........................................3311 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-Pinch..................................3316 Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window Main Switch / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti...................3317 Terminal and Reference Value for (Front and Rear) Power Window Switch / With Front and Rear Windo...................3318 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................3319 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3320 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3320 DATE MONITOR....................................................................................................3320 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3321 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart / With Front Power Window Anti-Pinch System.........................................3321 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti- Pinch System...............................3322 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check...........................................................................3324 Power Window Main Switch Power Supply Circuit Check.................................................................3325 Front Power Window Switch (Passenger Side) Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check....................................3326 Rear Power Window Switch (LH or RH) Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check / With Front and Rear P...................3327 Front Power Window Motor (Driver Side) Circuit Check................................................................3328 Front Power Window Motor (Passenger Side) Circuit Check.............................................................3329 Rear Power Window Motor (LH) Circuit Check / With Front Anti-Pinch Power Window System..............................3329 Rear Power Window Motor (RH) Circuit Check / With Front Anti-pinch Power Window System..............................3332 Rear Power Window Motor (LH or RH) Circuit Check / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch Sy...................3334 Limit Switch Circuit Check (Driver Side)............................................................................3335 Limit Switch Circuit Check (Passenger Side).........................................................................3336 Limit Switch Circuit Check (Rear LH or RH) / With Front and Rear Anti-Pinch System..................................3338 Encoder Circuit Check (Driver Side).................................................................................3340 Encoder Circuit Check (Passenger Side)..............................................................................3342 Encoder Circuit Check (Rear LH or RH) / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-Pinch System..........................3344 Door Switch Check...................................................................................................3346 Front Door Key Cylinder Switch Check................................................................................3348 Power Window Serial Link Check (Passenger Side).....................................................................3350 Power Window Serial Link Check (Rear LH or RH) / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System.................3352 Power Window Lock Switch Check......................................................................................3352 SIDE WINDOW GLASS.......................................................................................................3353 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3353 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3353 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3354 Repairing Water Leaks.......................................................................................3354 FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR..........................................................................................3355 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3355 DOOR GLASS......................................................................................................3355 Removal.....................................................................................................3355 Installation................................................................................................3356 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3356 Removal.....................................................................................................3356 Installation................................................................................................3356 Inspection after Removal....................................................................................3357 Disassembly and assembly............................................................................................3357 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3357 Disassembly.................................................................................................3357 Assembly....................................................................................................3357 Inspection after Installation.......................................................................................3357 SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH.........................................................................................3357 Setting of Limit Switch.....................................................................................3357 Resetting...................................................................................................3357 FITTING INSPECTION..............................................................................................3357 REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR...........................................................................................3359 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3359 DOOR GLASS......................................................................................................3359 Removal.....................................................................................................3359 Installation................................................................................................3360 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3360 Removal.....................................................................................................3360 Installation................................................................................................3361 Inspection after Removal....................................................................................3361 Disassembly and assembly............................................................................................3361 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3361 Disassembly.................................................................................................3361 Assembly....................................................................................................3361 Inspection after Installation.......................................................................................3361 SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH (WITH ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM ONLY)...........................................................3361 Resetting...................................................................................................3361 FITTING INSPECTION..............................................................................................3362 INSIDE MIRROR...........................................................................................................3363 Wiring Diagram —I/MIRR—.............................................................................................3363 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3364 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3364 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3364 COMPASS.........................................................................................................3364 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER....................................................................................................3365 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3365 System Description..................................................................................................3365 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3367 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3367 Schematic...........................................................................................................3368 Wiring Diagram — DEF —..............................................................................................3369 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM................................................................................3373 Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R...........................................................................3373 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................3374 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3375 Display Item List...........................................................................................3375 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3375 Display Item List...........................................................................................3375 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3376 Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart.....................................................................................3376 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check...........................................................................3377 Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check...........................................................................3378 Rear Window Defogger Power Supply Circuit Check.....................................................................3379 Rear Window Defogger Circuit Check..................................................................................3381 Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Check.....................................................................3382 Driver Side Door Mirror Defogger Circuit Check......................................................................3384 Passenger Side Door Mirror Defogger Circuit Check...................................................................3385 Rear Window Defogger Signal Check...................................................................................3385 Filament Check......................................................................................................3387 Filament Repair.....................................................................................................3387 REPAIR EQUIPMENT................................................................................................3387 REPAIRING PROCEDURE.............................................................................................3388 DOOR MIRROR.............................................................................................................3389 Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —/Without Memory Mirror.....................................................................3389 Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —/With Memory Mirror........................................................................3390 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................3392 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3393 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3393 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3393 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3393 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3393 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3394 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 82 idx.............................................................................................................................3396 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3397 A.......................................................................................................................3397 B.......................................................................................................................3397 C.......................................................................................................................3398 D.......................................................................................................................3398 E.......................................................................................................................3398 F.......................................................................................................................3399 G.......................................................................................................................3399 H.......................................................................................................................3399 I.......................................................................................................................3400 K.......................................................................................................................3400 L.......................................................................................................................3400 M.......................................................................................................................3401 N.......................................................................................................................3401 O.......................................................................................................................3401 P.......................................................................................................................3401 R.......................................................................................................................3402 S.......................................................................................................................3402 T.......................................................................................................................3402 U.......................................................................................................................3403 V.......................................................................................................................3403 W.......................................................................................................................3403 ip..............................................................................................................................3404 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3404 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3405 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3405 Precautions.........................................................................................................3405 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3406 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3406 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3406 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................3407 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3407 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................3407 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................3408 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................3408 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................3408 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................3408 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................3409 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................3409 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................3409 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................3409 DOORS...........................................................................................................3409 TRUNK...........................................................................................................3410 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................3410 SEATS...........................................................................................................3410 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................3410 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................3411 INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY...............................................................................................3413 Component Parts Drawing.............................................................................................3413 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3414 WORK STEP.......................................................................................................3414 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3415 (A) Front Kicking Plate (RH/LH).............................................................................3415 (B) Dash Side Finisher (RH/LH)..............................................................................3415 (C) Front Pillar Garnish (RH/LH)............................................................................3415 (D) A/T Select Lever Knob...................................................................................3415 (E) Instrument Clock Finisher...............................................................................3415 (F) A/T Console Finisher....................................................................................3415 (G) Console Finisher (RH/LH)................................................................................3415 (H) Center Console..........................................................................................3415 (I) Instrument Lower Cover..................................................................................3416 (J) Instrument Passenger Lower Panel........................................................................3416 (K) Instrument Driver Lower Panel...........................................................................3416 (L) Steering Column Front Lower Cover.......................................................................3416 (M) Steering Column Lower Cover.............................................................................3416 (N) Steering Column Upper Cover.............................................................................3417 (O) Wiper and Washer Switch.................................................................................3417 (P) Lighting and Turn Signal Switch.........................................................................3417 (Q) Steering Lock Escutcheon................................................................................3417 (R) Combination Meter Assembly..............................................................................3417 (S) Instrument Side Panel (RH/LH)...........................................................................3417 (T) Cluster Lid C...........................................................................................3418 (U) Display Unit and Audio Unit.............................................................................3418 (V) Front Defroster Grille (RH/LH)..........................................................................3418 (W) Combination Meter Bracket...............................................................................3418 (X) Side Ventilation (RH/LH)................................................................................3419 (Y) Instrument Panel and Pad................................................................................3419 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3419 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3419 A/T CONSOLE FINISHER............................................................................................3419 Disassembly.................................................................................................3420 Assembly....................................................................................................3420 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................3420 Disassembly.................................................................................................3420 Assembly....................................................................................................3421 INSTRUMENT PASSENGER LOWER PANEL................................................................................3421 Disassembly.................................................................................................3421 Assembly....................................................................................................3421 lan.............................................................................................................................3422 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3422 CAN.....................................................................................................................3426 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3426 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................3426 Precautions When Using CONSULT-II...............................................................................3426 CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II...........................................................................3426 Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3426 CAN SYSTEM..................................................................................................3426 Precautions For Harness Repair..................................................................................3427 CAN SYSTEM..................................................................................................3427 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW.........................................................................................3428 When Displaying CAN Communication System Errors.................................................................3428 WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED BY CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM..................................................3428 WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED EXCEPT CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM..............................................3428 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART................................................................................3429 Diagnosis Procedure.............................................................................................3430 SELECTING CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE SPECIFICATION TABLE)..................................................3430 ACQUISITION OF DATA BY CONSULT-II...........................................................................3431 HOW TO USE CHECK SHEET TABLE................................................................................3432 Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Reproduced................................3433 Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced............................3437 CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor..................................................................................3439 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR ECM.......................................................3439 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR TCM.......................................................3440 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT......................................3441 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG MNTR” SCREEN FOR DISPLAY UNIT......................................................3442 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR AWD CONTROL UNIT..........................................3443 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR ICC UNIT..................................................3444 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT......................................3445 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR BCM.......................................................3446 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR LDW CAMERA UNIT...........................................3447 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.................................3448 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT).............3449 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT..................................3449 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR IPDM E/R..................................................3450 CAN COMMUNICATION...................................................................................................3451 System Description..............................................................................................3451 CAN Communication Unit..........................................................................................3451 TYPE 1/TYPE 2/TYPE 9........................................................................................3451 System Diagram..........................................................................................3451 Input/Output Signal Chart...............................................................................3452 TYPE 3/TYPE 4...............................................................................................3455 System Diagram..........................................................................................3455 Input/Output Signal Chart...............................................................................3455 TYPE 5/TYPE 6/TYPE 10.......................................................................................3459 System Diagram..........................................................................................3459 Input/Output Signal Chart...............................................................................3460 TYPE 7/TYPE 8...............................................................................................3463 System Diagram..........................................................................................3463 Input/Output Signal Chart...............................................................................3463 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1).................................................................................................3468 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3468 Schematic.......................................................................................................3469 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3470 Check Sheet.....................................................................................................3473 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3475 Case 1..................................................................................................3475 Case 2..................................................................................................3476 Case 3..................................................................................................3477 Case 4..................................................................................................3478 Case 5..................................................................................................3479 Case 6..................................................................................................3480 Case 7..................................................................................................3481 Case 8..................................................................................................3482 Case 9..................................................................................................3483 Case 10.................................................................................................3484 Case 11.................................................................................................3485 Case 12.................................................................................................3486 Case 13.................................................................................................3487 Case 14.................................................................................................3488 Case 15.................................................................................................3489 Case 16.................................................................................................3490 Case 17.................................................................................................3491 Inspection Between TCM and Data Link Connector Circuit..........................................................3491 Inspection Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit...................................3492 Inspection Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) C...............3492 Inspection Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit Cir...............3493 ECM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3494 TCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3494 Display Unit Circuit Inspection.................................................................................3495 Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection..........................................................................3495 BCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3496 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection........................................................................3496 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Inspection...................................................................3497 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection................................................3497 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Inspection.....................................................................3498 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection.....................................................................................3499 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection............................................................................3499 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection......................................................................3505 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2).................................................................................................3506 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3506 Schematic.......................................................................................................3507 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3508 Check Sheet.....................................................................................................3511 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3514 Case 1..................................................................................................3514 Case 2..................................................................................................3515 Case 3..................................................................................................3516 Case 4..................................................................................................3517 Case 5..................................................................................................3518 Case 6..................................................................................................3519 Case 7..................................................................................................3520 Case 8..................................................................................................3521 Case 9..................................................................................................3522 Case 10.................................................................................................3523 Case 11.................................................................................................3524 Case 12.................................................................................................3525 Case 13.................................................................................................3526 Case 14.................................................................................................3527 Case 15.................................................................................................3528 Case 16.................................................................................................3529 Case 17.................................................................................................3530 Case 18.................................................................................................3531 Inspection Between TCM and Data Link Connector Circuit..........................................................3531 Inspection Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit...................................3532 Inspection Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) C...............3532 Inspection Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit Cir...............3533 ECM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3534 TCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3534 Display Unit Circuit Inspection.................................................................................3535 Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection..........................................................................3535 BCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3536 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection........................................................................3536 LDW Camera Unit Circuit Inspection..............................................................................3537 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Inspection...................................................................3538 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection................................................3538 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Inspection.....................................................................3539 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection.....................................................................................3539 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection............................................................................3540 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection......................................................................3546 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3).................................................................................................3547 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3547 Schematic.......................................................................................................3548 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3549 Check Sheet.....................................................................................................3552 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3556 Case 1..................................................................................................3556 Case 2..................................................................................................3557 Case 3..................................................................................................3558 Case 4..................................................................................................3559 Case 5..................................................................................................3560 Case 6..................................................................................................3561 Case 7..................................................................................................3562 Case 8..................................................................................................3563 Case 9..................................................................................................3564 Case 10.................................................................................................3565 Case 11.................................................................................................3566 Case 12.................................................................................................3567 Case 13.................................................................................................3568 Case 14.................................................................................................3569 Case 15.................................................................................................3570 Case 16.................................................................................................3571 Case 17.................................................................................................3572 Case 18.................................................................................................3573 Case 19.................................................................................................3574 Case 20.................................................................................................3575 Inspection Between TCM and Data Link Connector Circuit..........................................................3575 Inspection Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit...................................3576 Inspection Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) C...............3576 Inspection Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit Cir...............3577 ECM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3578 TCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3578 Display Control Unit Circuit Inspection.........................................................................3579 ICC Unit Circuit Inspection.....................................................................................3579 Intelligent Key Unit Circuit Inspection.........................................................................3580 Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection..........................................................................3580 BCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3581 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection........................................................................3581 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Inspection...................................................................3582 ICC Sensor Circuit Inspection...................................................................................3582 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection................................................3583 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Inspection.....................................................................3583 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection.....................................................................................3584 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection............................................................................3585 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection......................................................................3591 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4).................................................................................................3592 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3592 Schematic.......................................................................................................3593 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3594 Check Sheet.....................................................................................................3597 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3601 Case 1..................................................................................................3601 Case 2..................................................................................................3602 Case 3..................................................................................................3603 Case 4..................................................................................................3604 Case 5..................................................................................................3605 Case 6..................................................................................................3606 Case 7..................................................................................................3607 Case 8..................................................................................................3608 Case 9..................................................................................................3609 Case 10.................................................................................................3610 Case 11.................................................................................................3611 Case 12.................................................................................................3612 Case 13.................................................................................................3613 Case 14.................................................................................................3614 Case 15.................................................................................................3615 Case 16.................................................................................................3616 Case 17.................................................................................................3617 Case 18.................................................................................................3618 Case 19.................................................................................................3619 Case 20.................................................................................................3620 Case 21.................................................................................................3621 Inspection Between TCM and Data Link Connector Circuit..........................................................3621 Inspection Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit...................................3622 Inspection Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) C...............3622 Inspection Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit Cir...............3623 ECM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3624 TCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3624 Display Control Unit Circuit Inspection.........................................................................3625 ICC Unit Circuit Inspection.....................................................................................3625 Intelligent Key Unit Circuit Inspection.........................................................................3626 Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection..........................................................................3626 BCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3627 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection........................................................................3627 LDW Camera Unit Circuit Inspection..............................................................................3628 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Inspection...................................................................3629 ICC Sensor Circuit Inspection...................................................................................3629 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection................................................3630 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Inspection.....................................................................3630 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection.....................................................................................3631 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection............................................................................3632 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection......................................................................3639 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5).................................................................................................3640 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3640 Schematic.......................................................................................................3641 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3642 Check Sheet.....................................................................................................3645 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3648 Case 1..................................................................................................3648 Case 2..................................................................................................3649 Case 3..................................................................................................3650 Case 4..................................................................................................3651 Case 5..................................................................................................3652 Case 6..................................................................................................3653 Case 7..................................................................................................3654 Case 8..................................................................................................3655 Case 9..................................................................................................3656 Case 10.................................................................................................3657 Case 11.................................................................................................3658 Case 12.................................................................................................3659 Case 13.................................................................................................3660 Case 14.................................................................................................3661 Case 15.................................................................................................3662 Case 16.................................................................................................3663 Case 17.................................................................................................3664 Case 18.................................................................................................3665 Inspection Between TCM and Data Link Connector Circuit..........................................................3665 Inspection Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit...................................3666 Inspection Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) C...............3666 Inspection Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit Cir...............3667 ECM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3668 TCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3668 Display Unit Circuit Inspection.................................................................................3669 AWD Control Unit Circuit Inspection.............................................................................3669 Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection..........................................................................3670 BCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3670 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection........................................................................3671 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Inspection...................................................................3671 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection................................................3672 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Inspection.....................................................................3672 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection.....................................................................................3673 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection............................................................................3674 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection......................................................................3680 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6).................................................................................................3681 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3681 Schematic.......................................................................................................3682 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3683 Check Sheet.....................................................................................................3686 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3690 Case 1..................................................................................................3690 Case 2..................................................................................................3691 Case 3..................................................................................................3692 Case 4..................................................................................................3693 Case 5..................................................................................................3694 Case 6..................................................................................................3695 Case 7..................................................................................................3696 Case 8..................................................................................................3697 Case 9..................................................................................................3698 Case 10.................................................................................................3699 Case 11.................................................................................................3700 Case 12.................................................................................................3701 Case 13.................................................................................................3702 Case 14.................................................................................................3703 Case 15.................................................................................................3704 Case 16.................................................................................................3705 Case 17.................................................................................................3706 Case 18.................................................................................................3707 Case 19.................................................................................................3708 Inspection Between TCM and Data Link Connector Circuit..........................................................3708 Inspection Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit...................................3709 Inspection Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) C...............3709 Inspection Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit Cir...............3710 ECM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3711 TCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3711 Display Unit Circuit Inspection.................................................................................3712 AWD Control Unit Circuit Inspection.............................................................................3712 Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection..........................................................................3713 BCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3713 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection........................................................................3714 LDW Camera Unit Circuit Inspection..............................................................................3714 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Inspection...................................................................3715 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection................................................3716 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Inspection.....................................................................3716 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection.....................................................................................3717 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection............................................................................3718 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection......................................................................3724 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7).................................................................................................3725 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3725 Schematic.......................................................................................................3726 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3727 Check Sheet.....................................................................................................3730 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3734 Case 1..................................................................................................3734 Case 2..................................................................................................3735 Case 3..................................................................................................3736 Case 4..................................................................................................3737 Case 5..................................................................................................3738 Case 6..................................................................................................3739 Case 7..................................................................................................3740 Case 8..................................................................................................3741 Case 9..................................................................................................3742 Case 10.................................................................................................3743 Case 11.................................................................................................3744 Case 12.................................................................................................3745 Case 13.................................................................................................3746 Case 14.................................................................................................3747 Case 15.................................................................................................3748 Case 16.................................................................................................3749 Case 17.................................................................................................3750 Case 18.................................................................................................3751 Case 19.................................................................................................3752 Case 20.................................................................................................3753 Case 21.................................................................................................3754 Inspection Between TCM and Data Link Connector Circuit..........................................................3754 Inspection Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit...................................3755 Inspection Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) C...............3755 Inspection Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit Cir...............3756 ECM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3757 TCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3757 Display Control Unit Circuit Inspection.........................................................................3758 AWD Control Unit Circuit Inspection.............................................................................3758 ICC Unit Circuit Inspection.....................................................................................3759 Intelligent Key Unit Circuit Inspection.........................................................................3759 Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection..........................................................................3760 BCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3760 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection........................................................................3761 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Inspection...................................................................3761 ICC Sensor Circuit Inspection...................................................................................3762 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection................................................3762 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Inspection.....................................................................3763 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection.....................................................................................3764 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection............................................................................3765 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection......................................................................3771 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8).................................................................................................3772 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3772 Schematic.......................................................................................................3773 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3774 Check Sheet.....................................................................................................3777 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3781 Case 1..................................................................................................3781 Case 2..................................................................................................3782 Case 3..................................................................................................3783 Case 4..................................................................................................3784 Case 5..................................................................................................3785 Case 6..................................................................................................3786 Case 7..................................................................................................3787 Case 8..................................................................................................3788 Case 9..................................................................................................3789 Case 10.................................................................................................3790 Case 11.................................................................................................3791 Case 12.................................................................................................3792 Case 13.................................................................................................3793 Case 14.................................................................................................3794 Case 15.................................................................................................3795 Case 16.................................................................................................3796 Case 17.................................................................................................3797 Case 18.................................................................................................3798 Case 19.................................................................................................3799 Case 20.................................................................................................3800 Case 21.................................................................................................3801 Case 22.................................................................................................3802 Inspection Between TCM and Data Link Connector Circuit..........................................................3802 Inspection Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit...................................3803 Inspection Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) C...............3803 Inspection Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit Cir...............3804 ECM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3805 TCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3805 Display Control Unit Circuit Inspection.........................................................................3806 AWD Control Unit Circuit Inspection.............................................................................3806 ICC Unit Circuit Inspection.....................................................................................3807 Intelligent Key Unit Circuit Inspection.........................................................................3807 Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection..........................................................................3808 BCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3808 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection........................................................................3809 LDW Camera Unit Circuit Inspection..............................................................................3809 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Inspection...................................................................3810 ICC Sensor Circuit Inspection...................................................................................3811 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection................................................3811 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Inspection.....................................................................3812 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection.....................................................................................3812 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection............................................................................3813 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection......................................................................3820 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9).................................................................................................3821 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3821 Schematic.......................................................................................................3822 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3823 Check Sheet.....................................................................................................3826 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3828 Case 1..................................................................................................3828 Case 2..................................................................................................3829 Case 3..................................................................................................3830 Case 4..................................................................................................3831 Case 5..................................................................................................3832 Case 6..................................................................................................3833 Case 7..................................................................................................3834 Case 8..................................................................................................3835 Case 9..................................................................................................3836 Case 10.................................................................................................3837 Case 11.................................................................................................3838 Case 12.................................................................................................3839 Case 13.................................................................................................3840 Case 14.................................................................................................3841 Case 15.................................................................................................3842 Inspection Between TCM and Data Link Connector Circuit..........................................................3842 Inspection Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit...................................3843 Inspection Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) C...............3843 ECM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3844 TCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3844 Display Unit Circuit Inspection.................................................................................3845 Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection..........................................................................3845 BCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3846 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection........................................................................3846 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Inspection...................................................................3847 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection................................................3847 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection.....................................................................................3848 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection............................................................................3849 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection......................................................................3854 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)................................................................................................3855 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3855 Schematic.......................................................................................................3856 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3857 Check Sheet.....................................................................................................3860 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3862 Case 1..................................................................................................3862 Case 2..................................................................................................3863 Case 3..................................................................................................3864 Case 4..................................................................................................3865 Case 5..................................................................................................3866 Case 6..................................................................................................3867 Case 7..................................................................................................3868 Case 8..................................................................................................3869 Case 9..................................................................................................3870 Case 10.................................................................................................3871 Case 11.................................................................................................3872 Case 12.................................................................................................3873 Case 13.................................................................................................3874 Case 14.................................................................................................3875 Case 15.................................................................................................3876 Case 16.................................................................................................3877 Inspection Between TCM and Data Link Connector Circuit..........................................................3877 Inspection Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit...................................3878 Inspection Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) C...............3878 ECM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3879 TCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3879 Display Unit Circuit Inspection.................................................................................3880 AWD Control Unit Circuit Inspection.............................................................................3880 Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection..........................................................................3881 BCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3881 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection........................................................................3882 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Inspection...................................................................3882 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection................................................3883 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection.....................................................................................3883 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection............................................................................3884 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection......................................................................3890 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 82 lt..............................................................................................................................3892 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3892 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3896 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3896 General Precautions for Service Operations..........................................................................3897 HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE -.................................................................................................3898 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3898 System Description..................................................................................................3898 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3898 HEADLAMP OPERATION..............................................................................................3899 Low Beam Operation..........................................................................................3899 High Beam Operation/Flash-to-Pass Operation.................................................................3899 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3900 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3900 AUTO LIGHT OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)..............................................................................3900 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM.........................................................................................3900 XENON HEADLAMP..................................................................................................3900 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3900 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3900 Schematic...........................................................................................................3901 Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —...........................................................................................3902 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3906 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3906 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3907 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3907 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3907 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3909 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3909 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3910 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3910 Display Item List...........................................................................................3910 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3910 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3910 Display Item List...........................................................................................3910 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3911 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3911 Display Item List...........................................................................................3911 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................3911 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3912 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3913 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3913 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu..............................................................3913 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3914 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3914 Headlamp Does Not Change To High Beam (Both Sides)..................................................................3914 Headlamp Does Not Change To High Beam (One Side)....................................................................3916 High Beam Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate........................................................................3917 Headlamp Low Beam Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides)..................................................................3917 Headlamp Low Beam Does Not Illuminate (One Side)....................................................................3920 Headlamp RH Low Beam and High Beam Does Not Illuminate..............................................................3921 Headlamp LH Low Beam and High Beam Does Not Illuminate..............................................................3922 Headlamps Do Not Turn OFF...........................................................................................3923 General Information for Xenon Headlamp Trouble Diagnosis............................................................3925 Caution:............................................................................................................3925 Xenon Headlamp Trouble Diagnosis....................................................................................3925 Aiming Adjustment...................................................................................................3926 PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING....................................................................................3926 LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM..........................................................................................3926 ADJUSTMENT USING AN ADJUSTMENT SCREEN (LIGHT/DARK BORDERLINE)...................................................3927 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3927 HEADLAMP HIGH/LOW BEAM..........................................................................................3927 DAYTIME/PARKING LAMP............................................................................................3928 FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP..........................................................................................3928 FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP..........................................................................................3928 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3928 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3928 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3929 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3929 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3929 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3929 DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM....................................................................................................3930 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3930 System Description..................................................................................................3930 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3930 DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION.........................................................................................3931 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3931 AUTO LIGHT OPERATION............................................................................................3931 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3931 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3931 Schematic...........................................................................................................3932 Wiring Diagram — DTRL —.............................................................................................3933 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3937 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3937 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3938 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3938 INSPECTION PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT.........................................................................3939 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3940 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3940 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3941 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3941 Display Item List...........................................................................................3941 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3942 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3942 Display Item List...........................................................................................3942 Daytime Light Control Does Not Operate Properly.....................................................................3943 Aiming Adjustment...................................................................................................3945 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3945 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3945 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3945 AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM.......................................................................................................3946 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3946 System Description..................................................................................................3946 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3946 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3947 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3947 DELAY TIMER FUNCTION............................................................................................3947 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3947 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3947 Major Components and Functions......................................................................................3947 Schematic...........................................................................................................3948 Wiring Diagram — AUTO/L —...........................................................................................3949 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3952 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3953 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3953 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3954 SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS........................................................................................3954 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3954 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3956 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3956 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3957 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3957 Work Support Setting Item...................................................................................3957 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3957 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3957 Display Item List...........................................................................................3957 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3958 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3958 Display Item List...........................................................................................3958 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................3959 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3959 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3960 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3960 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu..............................................................3960 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3960 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3960 Symptom Chart.......................................................................................................3961 Lighting Switch Inspection..........................................................................................3961 Optical sensor System Inspection....................................................................................3962 Removal and Installation of Optical Sensor..........................................................................3964 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3964 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3964 HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL.................................................................................................3965 Schematic...........................................................................................................3965 Wiring Diagram — H/AIM —............................................................................................3966 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3969 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3969 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3969 Switch Circuit Inspection...........................................................................................3969 FRONT FOG LAMP..........................................................................................................3970 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3970 System Description..................................................................................................3970 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3970 FRONT FOG LAMP OPERATION........................................................................................3971 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3971 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3971 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3971 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3971 Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —............................................................................................3972 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3974 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3974 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3975 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3975 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3975 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3976 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................3976 Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides).....................................................................3977 Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (One Side).......................................................................3979 Aiming Adjustment...................................................................................................3980 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3981 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3981 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3981 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3981 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS....................................................................................3982 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3982 System Description..................................................................................................3982 TURN SIGNAL OPERATION...........................................................................................3982 LH Turn Signal Lamp.........................................................................................3982 RH Turn Signal Lamp.........................................................................................3983 HAZARD LAMP OPERATION...........................................................................................3983 REMOTE CONTROL ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION...........................................................................3984 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3985 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3985 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3985 Schematic...........................................................................................................3986 Wiring Diagram — TURN —.............................................................................................3987 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3990 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3991 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3991 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3991 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3993 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3993 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3994 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3994 Display Item List...........................................................................................3994 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3994 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3994 Display Item List...........................................................................................3994 Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate...................................................................................3994 Rear Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate..............................................................................3996 Hazard Warning Lamp Does Not Operate But Turn Signal Lamp Operate...................................................3998 Turn Signal Indicator Lamp Does Not Operate.........................................................................3999 Bulb Replacement (Front Turn Signal Lamp)...........................................................................3999 Bulb Replacement (Rear Turn Signal Lamp)............................................................................3999 Removal and Installation of Front Turn Signal Lamp..................................................................3999 Removal and Installation of Rear Turn Signal Lamp...................................................................3999 Removal and Installation of Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit......................................................4000 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4000 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4000 LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH.........................................................................................4001 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4001 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4001 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4001 HAZARD SWITCH...........................................................................................................4002 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4002 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4002 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4002 COMBINATION SWITCH......................................................................................................4003 Wiring Diagram — COMBSW —...........................................................................................4003 Combination Switch Reading Function.................................................................................4004 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................4004 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................4004 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4005 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4005 Display Item List...........................................................................................4005 Combination Switch Inspection.......................................................................................4006 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4008 STOP LAMP...............................................................................................................4009 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................4009 System Description..................................................................................................4009 Schematic...........................................................................................................4010 Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —...........................................................................................4011 Stop Lamp Does Not Operate..........................................................................................4014 High-Mounted Stop Lamp..............................................................................................4016 BULB REPLACEMENT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................................4016 Stop Lamp...........................................................................................................4016 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................4016 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................4016 Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit..................................................................................4016 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................4016 STEP LAMP...............................................................................................................4017 Front Door Step Lamp................................................................................................4017 BULB REPLACEMENT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................................4017 Rear Door Step Lamp.................................................................................................4017 BULB REPLACEMENT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................................4017 BACK-UP LAMP............................................................................................................4018 Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —...........................................................................................4018 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................4019 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4019 PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS...................................................................................4020 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................4020 System Description..................................................................................................4020 OUT LINE........................................................................................................4020 OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH....................................................................................4021 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................4022 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................4022 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4022 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4022 Schematic...........................................................................................................4023 Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —...........................................................................................4024 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................4029 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................4029 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4030 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4030 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................4030 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................4031 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................4031 Parking, License Plate and Side Marker Lamps Do Not Illuminate......................................................4031 Tail Lamp Does Not Operate..........................................................................................4037 Parking, License Plate, Side Maker and Tail Lamps Do Not Turn OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes)........................4038 License Plate Lamp..................................................................................................4038 BULB REPLACEMENT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................................4038 Front Parking Lamp..................................................................................................4039 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................4039 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................4039 Tail Lamp...........................................................................................................4039 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................4039 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................4039 Front Side Marker Lamp..............................................................................................4039 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................4039 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................4039 Rear Side Marker Lamp...............................................................................................4039 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................4039 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................4039 Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit..................................................................................4039 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................4039 REAR COMBINATION LAMP...................................................................................................4040 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................4040 REAR FENDER SIDE (REAR SIDE MARKER LAMP BULB)...................................................................4040 BACK DOOR SIDE (BACK-UP LAMP)...................................................................................4040 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4040 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4040 Rear Fender Side............................................................................................4040 Trunk Lid Side..............................................................................................4041 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4041 VANITY MIRROR LAMP......................................................................................................4042 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................4042 MAP LAMP................................................................................................................4043 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................4043 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4043 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4043 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4043 PERSONAL LAMP...........................................................................................................4044 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................4044 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4044 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4044 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4044 LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP.......................................................................................................4045 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................4045 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4045 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4045 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4045 IGNITION KEY HOLE ILLUMINATION..........................................................................................4046 Bulb Replacement, Removal and Installation..........................................................................4046 GLOVE BOX LAMP..........................................................................................................4047 Bulb Replacement, Removal and Installation..........................................................................4047 ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION....................................................................................................4048 Bulb Replacement and Removal and Installation.......................................................................4048 CIGARETTE LIGHTER ILLUMINATION..........................................................................................4049 Bulb Replacement and Removal and Installation.......................................................................4049 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP......................................................................................................4050 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................4050 System Description..................................................................................................4050 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND.........................................................................................4051 SWITCH OPERATION................................................................................................4052 ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION.......................................................................................4053 Without Intelligent Key System..............................................................................4053 With Intelligent Key System.................................................................................4054 INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................4054 Schematic...........................................................................................................4056 Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —...........................................................................................4058 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................4066 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4067 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4067 CHECK FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.......................................................................4067 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................4068 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................4068 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................4069 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4069 Display Item List...........................................................................................4069 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4069 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4069 Display Item List...........................................................................................4069 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4070 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4070 Display Item List...........................................................................................4070 Interior Room Lamp Control Does Not Operate.........................................................................4071 Map Lamp Control Does Not Operate...................................................................................4072 Personal Lamp Control Does Not Operate..............................................................................4074 Ignition Key Hole Illumination Control Does Not Operate.............................................................4075 All Step Lamps Do Not Operate.......................................................................................4077 All Interior Room Lamps Do Not Operate..............................................................................4078 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................4078 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP..............................................................................................4078 MAP LAMP........................................................................................................4078 PERSONAL LAMP...................................................................................................4078 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4079 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP..............................................................................................4079 MAP LAMP........................................................................................................4079 PERSONAL LAMP...................................................................................................4079 ILLUMINATION............................................................................................................4080 System Description..................................................................................................4080 ILLUMINATION OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH.......................................................................4080 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................4081 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4081 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4082 Schematic...........................................................................................................4083 Wiring Diagram — ILL —..............................................................................................4085 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4093 ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH.....................................................................................4093 GLOVE BOX LAMP..................................................................................................4093 FRONT DOOR INSIDE ILLUMINATION..................................................................................4093 BULB SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................................4094 Headlamp............................................................................................................4094 Exterior Lamp.......................................................................................................4094 Interior Lamp/Illumination..........................................................................................4094 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 82 lu..............................................................................................................................4096 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4096 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................4098 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................4098 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................4098 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................4098 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................4099 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................4099 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................4099 LUBRICATION SYSTEM..................................................................................................4100 Lubrication Circuit.............................................................................................4100 System Chart....................................................................................................4101 ENGINE OIL..........................................................................................................4102 Inspection......................................................................................................4102 ENGINE OIL LEVEL............................................................................................4102 ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE.......................................................................................4102 ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE..........................................................................................4102 OIL PRESSURE CHECK..........................................................................................4103 Changing Engine Oil.............................................................................................4104 OIL FILTER..........................................................................................................4105 Removal and Installation........................................................................................4105 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................4105 INSTALLATION................................................................................................4105 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................4105 OIL FILTER BRACKET (AWD)............................................................................................4107 Components......................................................................................................4107 Removal and Installation........................................................................................4107 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................4107 INSTALLATION................................................................................................4107 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................4108 OIL COOLER..........................................................................................................4109 Components......................................................................................................4109 Removal and Installation........................................................................................4110 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................4110 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................4111 Oil Cooler..............................................................................................4111 Relief Valve............................................................................................4111 INSTALLATION................................................................................................4111 2WD Model...............................................................................................4111 AWD Model...............................................................................................4111 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................4111 OIL PUMP............................................................................................................4112 Components......................................................................................................4112 Removal and Installation........................................................................................4112 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................4112 INSTALLATION................................................................................................4112 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................4112 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................4112 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................4112 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................4113 Oil Pump Clearance......................................................................................4113 Regulator Valve Clearance...............................................................................4114 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................4114 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................4115 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................4115 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE.........................................................................................4115 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)...........................................................................4115 OIL PUMP....................................................................................................4115 REGULATOR VALVE.............................................................................................4115 VK45DE..................................................................................................................4116 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................4116 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................4116 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................4116 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................4117 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................4117 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................4117 LUBRICATION SYSTEM..................................................................................................4118 Lubrication Circuit.............................................................................................4118 System Chart....................................................................................................4119 ENGINE OIL..........................................................................................................4120 Inspection......................................................................................................4120 ENGINE OIL LEVEL............................................................................................4120 ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE.......................................................................................4120 ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE..........................................................................................4120 OIL PRESSURE CHECK..........................................................................................4120 Changing Engine Oil.............................................................................................4122 OIL FILTER..........................................................................................................4123 Removal and Installation........................................................................................4123 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................4123 INSTALLATION................................................................................................4123 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................4123 OIL COOLER..........................................................................................................4124 Removal and Installation........................................................................................4124 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................4124 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................4125 Oil Cooler..............................................................................................4125 Relief Valve............................................................................................4125 INSTALLATION................................................................................................4125 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................4125 OIL PUMP............................................................................................................4126 Removal and Installation........................................................................................4126 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................4126 INSTALLATION................................................................................................4126 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................4127 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................4127 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................4127 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................4127 Oil Pump Clearance......................................................................................4127 Regulator Valve Clearance...............................................................................4128 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................4128 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................4129 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................4129 OIL PRESSURE................................................................................................4129 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)...........................................................................4129 OIL PUMP....................................................................................................4129 REGULATOR VALVE.............................................................................................4129 ma..............................................................................................................................4130 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4130 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4132 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4132 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4132 GENERAL MAINTENANCE.....................................................................................................4133 Explanation of General Maintenance..................................................................................4133 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE....................................................................................................4136 Introduction of Periodic Maintenance................................................................................4136 Schedule 1..........................................................................................................4137 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.............................................................................4137 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE....................................................................................4138 Schedule 2..........................................................................................................4139 EMISSION COMTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.............................................................................4139 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE....................................................................................4140 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS.......................................................................................4141 Fluids and Lubricants...............................................................................................4141 SAE Viscosity Number................................................................................................4142 GASOLINE ENGINE OIL.............................................................................................4142 Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio...................................................................................4142 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE)......................................................................................4143 Checking Drive Belts................................................................................................4143 Drive Belts Tension Adjustment......................................................................................4143 ALTERNATOR AND POWER STEERING OIL PUMP BELT.....................................................................4144 A/C COMPRESSOR BELT.............................................................................................4144 Changing Engine Coolant.............................................................................................4144 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.........................................................................................4144 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT........................................................................................4145 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.........................................................................................4146 Checking Fuel Lines.................................................................................................4146 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.........................................................................................4147 VISCOUS PAPER TYPE..............................................................................................4147 Changing Engine Oil.................................................................................................4147 Changing Oil Filter.................................................................................................4148 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4148 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4148 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................4149 Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type).........................................................................4149 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4149 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4149 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4150 Checking EVAP Vapor Lines...........................................................................................4150 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VK45DE ENGINE)......................................................................................4151 Checking Drive Belts................................................................................................4151 Tension Adjustment..................................................................................................4151 Changing Engine Coolant.............................................................................................4151 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.........................................................................................4152 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT........................................................................................4152 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.........................................................................................4153 Checking Fuel Lines.................................................................................................4154 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.........................................................................................4154 VISCOUS PAPER TYPE..............................................................................................4154 Changing Engine Oil.................................................................................................4154 Changing Oil Filter.................................................................................................4155 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4155 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4155 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................4156 Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type).........................................................................4156 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4156 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4156 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4157 Checking EVAP Vapor Lines...........................................................................................4157 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE............................................................................................4158 Checking Exhaust System.............................................................................................4158 Checking A/T Fluid..................................................................................................4158 Changing A/T Fluid..................................................................................................4160 Checking Transfer Fluid.............................................................................................4160 Changing Transfer Fluid.............................................................................................4161 Checking Propeller Shaft............................................................................................4161 Checking Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................4161 Changing Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................4162 Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type)..............................................................................4162 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4162 WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................4162 Tire Rotation.......................................................................................................4164 Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks................................................................................4164 Checking Brake Lines and Cables.....................................................................................4164 Changing Brake Fluid................................................................................................4164 Checking Disc Brake.................................................................................................4165 ROTOR...........................................................................................................4165 CALIPER.........................................................................................................4165 PAD.............................................................................................................4165 Checking Steering Gear and Linkage..................................................................................4165 STEERING GEAR...................................................................................................4165 STEERING LINKAGE................................................................................................4165 Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines.............................................................................4166 Axle and Suspension Parts...........................................................................................4166 Drive Shaft.........................................................................................................4167 Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latch............................................................................4167 Checking Seat Belt, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors and Adjusters......................................................4168 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4169 Standard and Limit..................................................................................................4169 BELT DEFLECTION AND TENSION (VQ35DE)............................................................................4169 BELT DEFLECTION AND TENSION (VK45DE)............................................................................4169 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VQ35DE)..................................................................4169 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VK45DE)..................................................................4169 RADIATOR........................................................................................................4169 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VQ35DE)......................................................................4169 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VK45DE)......................................................................4170 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) (VQ35DE)......................................................................4170 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) (VK45DE)......................................................................4170 WHEEL BALANCE...................................................................................................4170 pb..............................................................................................................................4172 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4172 PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM....................................................................................................4173 On-Vehicle Service..................................................................................................4173 PEDAL STROKE....................................................................................................4173 INSPECT COMPONENTS..............................................................................................4173 ADJUSTMENT......................................................................................................4173 PARKING BRAKE CONTROL...................................................................................................4174 Components..........................................................................................................4174 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4174 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4174 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4175 PARKING BRAKE SHOE......................................................................................................4176 Components..........................................................................................................4176 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4176 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4176 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4177 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4177 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4178 Parking Drum Brake..................................................................................................4178 Parking Brake Control...............................................................................................4178 pg..............................................................................................................................4180 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4180 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................4182 Schematic...........................................................................................................4182 Wiring Diagram - POWER -............................................................................................4183 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION.............................................................4183 ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN “ACC” OR “ON”..........................................................4189 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN “ON” AND/OR “START”.....................................................4191 Fuse................................................................................................................4196 Fusible Link........................................................................................................4196 Circuit Breaker.....................................................................................................4196 IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)............................................................4197 System Description..................................................................................................4197 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R..................................................................................4197 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL..................................................................................4197 IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL.........................................................................................4198 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4198 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4198 Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction....................................................................4198 CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)......................................................................................4199 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE.................................................................................4199 SELF-DIAG RESULTS...............................................................................................4200 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4200 Display Item List...........................................................................................4200 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4201 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4201 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu..............................................................4201 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4201 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4201 Auto Active Test....................................................................................................4203 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................4203 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................4203 INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE.............................................................................4203 Concept of Auto Active Test.................................................................................4204 Schematic...........................................................................................................4205 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement.......................................................................................4206 IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection............................................................................4207 Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis).........................................................................4208 Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R................................................................................4209 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4209 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4209 GROUND..................................................................................................................4210 Ground Distribution.................................................................................................4210 MAIN HARNESS....................................................................................................4210 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS.............................................................................................4213 ENGINE HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................4216 ENGINE HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................4217 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................4218 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................4219 BODY HARNESS....................................................................................................4220 BODY NO. 2 HARNESS..............................................................................................4223 ROOM LAMP HARNESS...............................................................................................4224 HARNESS.................................................................................................................4225 Harness Layout......................................................................................................4225 HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT......................................................................................4225 To Use the Grid Reference...................................................................................4225 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................4226 MAIN HARNESS....................................................................................................4227 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS.............................................................................................4230 Engine Compartment..........................................................................................4230 Passenger Compartment.......................................................................................4232 ENGINE HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................4233 ENGINE HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................4234 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................4235 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................4237 BODY HARNESS....................................................................................................4239 BODY NO. 2 HARNESS..............................................................................................4241 ROOM LAMP HARNESS...............................................................................................4242 FRONT DOOR HARNESS..............................................................................................4243 LH Side.....................................................................................................4243 RH Side.....................................................................................................4243 REAR DOOR HARNESS...............................................................................................4244 LH Side.....................................................................................................4244 RH Side.....................................................................................................4244 BACK DOOR HARNESS...............................................................................................4245 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)...................................................................................4246 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION...............................................................................................4249 Electrical Units Location...........................................................................................4249 ENGINE COMPARTMENT..............................................................................................4249 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT...........................................................................................4250 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT.............................................................................................4252 HARNESS CONNECTOR.......................................................................................................4253 Description.........................................................................................................4253 HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)............................................................................4253 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)..........................................................................4254 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................4255 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................4255 SMJ (SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION)...........................................................................................4257 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................4257 STANDARDIZED RELAY......................................................................................................4259 Description.........................................................................................................4259 NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS................................................................4259 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS.....................................................................................4259 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B).........................................................................................4261 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................4261 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................4262 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................4262 pr..............................................................................................................................4264 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4264 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4265 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4265 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4265 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4266 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4266 FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT...................................................................................................4267 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................4267 APPEARANCE AND NOISE INSPECTION.................................................................................4267 PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION.......................................................................................4267 Components..........................................................................................................4267 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4268 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4268 INSPECTION......................................................................................................4268 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4269 REAR PROPELLER SHAFT....................................................................................................4270 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................4270 APPEARANCE AND NOISE INSPECTION.................................................................................4270 PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION.......................................................................................4270 Components..........................................................................................................4271 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4272 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4272 INSPECTION......................................................................................................4273 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4274 Disassembly and Assembly of Center Bearing..........................................................................4275 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4275 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4276 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4277 General Specifications..............................................................................................4277 2WD MODELS......................................................................................................4277 AWD MODELS......................................................................................................4277 Journal Axal Play...................................................................................................4277 Propeller Shaft Runout..............................................................................................4277 ps..............................................................................................................................4278 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4278 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4280 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4280 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect..........................................4280 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................4280 Precautions for Steering System.....................................................................................4280 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4282 Special Service Tools (SST).........................................................................................4282 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4283 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4284 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4284 POWER STEERING FLUID....................................................................................................4285 Checking Fluid Level................................................................................................4285 Checking Fluid Leakage..............................................................................................4285 Air Bleeding Hydraulic System.......................................................................................4285 STEERING WHEEL..........................................................................................................4287 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................4287 CHECKING CONDITION OF INSTALLATION..............................................................................4287 CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY....................................................................................4287 CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL.....................................................................4287 CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE...........................................................................4287 CHECKING FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE..............................................................................4288 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4288 STEERING COLUMN.........................................................................................................4289 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4289 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4289 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4291 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4291 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................4291 Components (Without Automatic Drive Positioner).....................................................................4292 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4292 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4292 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4293 Components (With Automatic Drive Positioner)........................................................................4294 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4295 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4295 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4295 POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE.........................................................................................4296 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4296 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4296 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4297 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................4298 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4299 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4300 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4302 Boot........................................................................................................4302 Rack........................................................................................................4302 Sub-Gear Assembly...........................................................................................4302 Gear Housing Assembly.......................................................................................4302 Outer Socket and Inner Socket...............................................................................4302 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4303 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP.................................................................................................4308 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................4308 CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE (VQ35DE MODELS)....................................................................4308 CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE (VK45DE MODELS)....................................................................4308 Removal and Installation (VQ35DE Models)............................................................................4309 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4309 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4310 Removal and Installation (VK45DE Models)............................................................................4310 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4310 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4310 Disassembly and Assembly (VQ35DE Models)............................................................................4310 INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY...................................................................................4310 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4311 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4311 Body Assembly and Rear Cover Inspection.....................................................................4311 Cartridge Assembly Inspection...............................................................................4311 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4311 Disassembly and Assembly (VK45DE Models)............................................................................4314 INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY...................................................................................4314 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4314 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4315 Body Assembly and Rear Cover Inspection.....................................................................4315 Cartridge Assembly Inspection...............................................................................4315 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4315 HYDRAULIC LINE..........................................................................................................4318 Components..........................................................................................................4318 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4320 Component...........................................................................................................4321 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4322 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4323 Steering Wheel......................................................................................................4323 Steering Angle......................................................................................................4323 Steering Column.....................................................................................................4323 Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket..............................................................................4323 Steering Gear.......................................................................................................4324 Oil Pump............................................................................................................4324 Steering Fluid......................................................................................................4324 rax.............................................................................................................................4326 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4326 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4327 Caution.............................................................................................................4327 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4328 Special Service Tools (SST).........................................................................................4328 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4328 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4329 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4329 WHEEL HUB...............................................................................................................4330 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................4330 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION........................................................................................4330 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4330 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4330 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4331 Ball Joint Inspection.......................................................................................4331 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4331 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4331 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4331 Wheel Bearing...............................................................................................4331 Bushing.....................................................................................................4332 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4332 Wheel Hub...................................................................................................4332 Axle........................................................................................................4332 Back Plate..................................................................................................4332 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4332 Bushing.....................................................................................................4332 Wheel Bearing...............................................................................................4333 INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................4333 REAR DRIVE SHAFT........................................................................................................4334 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4334 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4334 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4334 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4334 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4335 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4335 Final Drive Side............................................................................................4335 Wheel Side..................................................................................................4336 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4336 Shaft.......................................................................................................4336 Joint Sub-Assembly..........................................................................................4336 Sliding Joint Side (Housing)................................................................................4336 Ball Cage...................................................................................................4336 Steel Ball..................................................................................................4336 Inner Race..................................................................................................4336 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4337 Final Drive Side............................................................................................4337 Wheel Side..................................................................................................4338 SERVICE DATA............................................................................................................4340 Wheel Bearing.......................................................................................................4340 Drive Shaft.........................................................................................................4340 rf..............................................................................................................................4342 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4342 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4343 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4343 Precautions.........................................................................................................4343 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4344 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4344 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4344 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................4345 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4345 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................4345 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................4346 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................4346 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................4346 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................4346 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................4347 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................4347 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................4347 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................4347 DOORS...........................................................................................................4347 TRUNK...........................................................................................................4348 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................4348 SEATS...........................................................................................................4348 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................4348 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................4349 SUNROOF.................................................................................................................4351 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................4351 System Description..................................................................................................4352 TILT UP / SLIDE CLOSE OPERATION.................................................................................4352 TILT DOWN / SLIDE OPEN OPERATION................................................................................4352 AUTO OPERATION..................................................................................................4352 RETAINED POWER OPERATION........................................................................................4352 ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION.............................................................................................4353 MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE..........................................................................................4353 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE........................................................................................4353 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4354 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4354 Wiring Diagram — SROOF —............................................................................................4355 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................4356 Terminals and Reference Value for Sunroof Motor Assembly............................................................4356 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4357 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................4357 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4358 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................4358 DATE MONITOR....................................................................................................4358 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom..................................................................................4359 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check of BCM........................................................................4359 Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check........................................................4360 Sunroof Switch System Check.........................................................................................4361 Door Switch Check...................................................................................................4363 Wind Deflector Inspection...........................................................................................4365 Link and Wire Assembly..............................................................................................4365 Fitting Adjustment..................................................................................................4365 LID WEATHERSTRIP OVERLAP ADJUSTMENT AND SURFACE MISMATCH ADJUSTMENT.............................................4366 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4366 SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY...........................................................................................4368 Removal.....................................................................................................4368 Installation................................................................................................4369 GLASS LID.......................................................................................................4369 Removal.....................................................................................................4369 Installation................................................................................................4369 SUNSHADE........................................................................................................4370 Removal.....................................................................................................4370 Installation................................................................................................4370 WIND DEFLECTOR..................................................................................................4370 Removal.....................................................................................................4370 Installation................................................................................................4370 SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY..........................................................................................4370 Removal.....................................................................................................4370 Installation................................................................................................4371 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 82 rfd.............................................................................................................................4372 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4372 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4373 Service Notice or Precautions.......................................................................................4373 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4374 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4374 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4377 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4378 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4378 DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................4379 Cross-Sectional View................................................................................................4379 DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL...................................................................................................4380 Changing Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................4380 DRAINING........................................................................................................4380 FILLING.........................................................................................................4380 Checking Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................4380 OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL.......................................................................................4380 FRONT OIL SEAL..........................................................................................................4381 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4381 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4381 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4382 SIDE OIL SEAL...........................................................................................................4383 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4383 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4383 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4383 REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY...............................................................................................4385 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4385 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................4385 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4385 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4386 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4387 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................4387 ASSEMBLY INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT..............................................................................4388 Total Preload Torque........................................................................................4388 Drive Gear Runout...........................................................................................4388 Tooth Contact...............................................................................................4389 Backlash....................................................................................................4390 Companion Flange Runout.....................................................................................4391 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4392 Differential Assembly.......................................................................................4392 Drive Pinion Assembly.......................................................................................4394 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4396 ADJUSTMENT AND SELECTION OF ADJUSTING WASHERS...................................................................4396 Differential Side Gear Clearance............................................................................4396 Side Bearing Preload........................................................................................4397 Pinion Gear Height..........................................................................................4398 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4401 Drive Pinion Assembly.......................................................................................4401 Differential Assembly.......................................................................................4403 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4407 General Specifications..............................................................................................4407 Inspection and Adjustment...........................................................................................4407 DRIVE GEAR RUNOUT...............................................................................................4407 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE................................................................................4407 PRELOAD TORQUE..................................................................................................4407 BACKLASH........................................................................................................4407 COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT.........................................................................................4407 SELECTIVE PARTS.................................................................................................4407 Side Gear Thrust Washer.....................................................................................4407 Pinion Height Adjusting Washer..............................................................................4408 Side Bearing Adjusting Washer...............................................................................4408 rsu.............................................................................................................................4410 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4410 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4411 Cautions............................................................................................................4411 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4412 Special Service Tools (SST).........................................................................................4412 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4412 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4413 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4413 REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY................................................................................................4414 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................4414 INSPECTION OF SUSPENSION ARM BALL JOINT END PLAY................................................................4414 SHOCK ABSORBER INSPECTION.......................................................................................4414 Wheel Alignment Inspection..........................................................................................4414 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................4414 PRELIMINARY CHECK...............................................................................................4414 CAMBER INSPECTION...............................................................................................4414 TOE-IN..........................................................................................................4415 Components..........................................................................................................4416 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4417 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4417 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4417 SHOCK ABSORBER..........................................................................................................4418 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4418 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4418 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4418 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4418 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4418 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4418 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4419 Bound Bumper and Bushing....................................................................................4419 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4419 SUSPENSION ARM..........................................................................................................4420 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4420 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4420 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4420 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................4420 Ball Joint Inspection.......................................................................................4420 Swing Torque Inspection.....................................................................................4420 Rotating Torque Inspection..................................................................................4420 Axial End Play Inspection...................................................................................4420 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4421 RADIUS ROD..............................................................................................................4422 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4422 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4422 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4422 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4422 FRONT LOWER LINK........................................................................................................4423 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4423 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4423 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4423 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4423 REAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING...........................................................................................4424 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4424 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4424 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4424 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4424 STABILIZER BAR..........................................................................................................4425 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4425 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4425 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4425 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4425 REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER..................................................................................................4426 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4426 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4426 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4426 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4426 SERVICE DATA............................................................................................................4427 Wheel Alignment.....................................................................................................4427 Ball Joint..........................................................................................................4427 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*).........................................................................................4427 sb..............................................................................................................................4428 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4428 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4429 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4429 Precaution for Seat Belt Service....................................................................................4429 AFTER A COLLISION...............................................................................................4429 SEAT BELTS..............................................................................................................4430 System Description..................................................................................................4430 SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME.........................................................................................4430 SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP..........................................................................................4430 Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt.........................................................................4430 REMOVAL OF FRONT SEAT BELT RETRACTOR............................................................................4431 INSTALLATION OF FRONT SEAT BELT RETRACTOR.......................................................................4431 REMOVAL OF FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE...............................................................................4431 INSTALLATION OF FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE..........................................................................4431 Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt..........................................................................4432 REMOVAL OF REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTOR.............................................................................4432 INSTALLATION OF REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTOR........................................................................4433 Seat Belt Inspection................................................................................................4433 AFTER A COLLISION...............................................................................................4433 PRELIMINARY CHECK...............................................................................................4433 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION.......................................................................4434 Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)...................................4434 Stationary Inspection for ELR Function......................................................................4434 Stationary Inspection for ALR Function......................................................................4434 Moving Inspection for ELR Function..........................................................................4434 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE INSPECTION......................................................................4435 LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM....................................................................4436 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4436 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4436 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4436 TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT........................................................................................4437 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4437 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4437 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4437 sc..............................................................................................................................4438 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4438 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4439 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4439 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4440 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4440 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4440 BATTERY.................................................................................................................4441 How to Handle Battery...............................................................................................4441 METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE............................................................................4441 CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL......................................................................................4442 Sulphation..................................................................................................4442 SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK..........................................................................................4442 Hydrometer Temperature Correction...........................................................................4442 CHARGING THE BATTERY............................................................................................4443 Charging Rates..............................................................................................4443 Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Battery)............................................4443 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART....................................................................................4445 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4446 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4446 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4446 STARTING SYSTEM.........................................................................................................4447 System Description..................................................................................................4447 Wiring Diagram — START —............................................................................................4448 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4448 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4449 Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Starting)...........................................4450 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART....................................................................................4450 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4451 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1..........................................................................................4452 Check “B” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4452 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2..........................................................................................4453 Check “S” Connector Circuit.................................................................................4453 MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE.......................................4453 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4454 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4454 Removal.....................................................................................................4454 Installation................................................................................................4454 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS (2WD)......................................................................................4455 Removal.....................................................................................................4455 Installation................................................................................................4455 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS (AWD)......................................................................................4456 Removal.....................................................................................................4456 Installation................................................................................................4456 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4457 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4457 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS (2WD)......................................................................................4458 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS (AWD)......................................................................................4459 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4459 Pinion/Clutch Check.........................................................................................4459 CHARGING SYSTEM.........................................................................................................4460 System Description..................................................................................................4460 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR...........................................................................................4460 Wiring Diagram — CHARGE —...........................................................................................4461 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4461 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4462 Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Charging)...........................................4463 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART....................................................................................4464 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4465 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION..........................................................................................4466 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1..........................................................................................4467 Check “L” Terminal Circuit (Open)...........................................................................4467 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2..........................................................................................4468 Check “L” Terminal Circuit (Short)..........................................................................4468 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3..........................................................................................4468 Check “S” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4468 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4..........................................................................................4469 Check “B” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4469 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4470 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4470 Removal.....................................................................................................4470 Alternator Pulley Inspection................................................................................4471 Installation................................................................................................4471 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4471 Removal.....................................................................................................4471 Alternator Pulley Inspection................................................................................4472 Installation................................................................................................4472 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4473 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4473 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4474 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4475 Battery.............................................................................................................4475 Starter.............................................................................................................4475 Alternator..........................................................................................................4475 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 82 se..............................................................................................................................4476 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4476 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4478 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4478 Service Notice......................................................................................................4478 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4479 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4479 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4479 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.....................................................................................4480 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4480 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................4480 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................4481 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................4481 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................4481 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................4481 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................4482 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................4482 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................4482 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................4482 DOORS...........................................................................................................4482 TRUNK...........................................................................................................4483 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................4483 SEATS...........................................................................................................4483 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................4483 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................4484 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER..............................................................................................4486 System Description..................................................................................................4486 MANUAL OPERATION................................................................................................4486 AUTOMATIC OPERATION.............................................................................................4486 MEMORY STORING AND KEY FOB INTERLOCK STORING....................................................................4487 MEMORY SWITCH OPERATION.........................................................................................4488 ENTRY OPERATION.................................................................................................4488 EXITING OPERATION...............................................................................................4488 KEY FOB INTERLOCK OPERATION.....................................................................................4489 FAIL- SAFE MODE.................................................................................................4489 CANCEL OF FAIL-SAFE MODE........................................................................................4489 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................4490 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4491 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4491 Schematic...........................................................................................................4492 Wiring Diagram —AUT/DP—.............................................................................................4494 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................4505 Terminals and Reference Values for Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit..........................................4505 Terminals and Reference Values for Driver Seat Control Unit.........................................................4507 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4510 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4510 SETTING CHANGE FUNCTION.........................................................................................4510 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND...................................................................................4511 CONSULT-II Function (AUTO DRIVE POS.)...............................................................................4513 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE.................................................................................4513 SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS..........................................................................................4514 Display Item List...........................................................................................4514 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4515 Selection from Menu.........................................................................................4515 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4516 Display Item List...........................................................................................4516 Check CAN Communication System Inspection...........................................................................4517 Symptom Chart.......................................................................................................4517 Sliding Motor Circuit Check.........................................................................................4518 Reclining Motor Circuit Check.......................................................................................4520 Front Lifting Motor Circuit Check...................................................................................4521 Rear Lifting Motor Circuit Check....................................................................................4523 Telescopic Motor Circuit Check......................................................................................4524 Tilt Motor Circuit Check............................................................................................4525 Driver Side Mirror Motor Circuit Check..............................................................................4527 Passenger Side Mirror Motor Circuit Check...........................................................................4528 Sliding Sensor Circuit Check........................................................................................4530 Reclining Sensor Circuit Check......................................................................................4531 Front Lifting Sensor Circuit Check..................................................................................4532 Rear Lifting Sensor Circuit Check...................................................................................4533 Telescopic Sensor Circuit Check.....................................................................................4534 Tilt Sensor Circuit Check...........................................................................................4535 Driver Side Mirror Sensor Circuit Check.............................................................................4536 Passenger Side Mirror Sensor Circuit Check..........................................................................4538 Steering and Door Mirror Sensor Power and Ground Circuit Check......................................................4540 Front Door Switch (Driver Side) Circuit Check.......................................................................4541 Sliding Switch Circuit Check........................................................................................4543 Reclining Switch Check..............................................................................................4544 Front Lifting Switch Circuit Check..................................................................................4546 Rear Lifting Switch Circuit Check...................................................................................4547 Sliding Switch and Reclining Switch Ground Circuit Check............................................................4548 Front Lifting Switch and Rear Lifting Switch Ground Circuit Check...................................................4549 Telescopic Switch Circuit Check.....................................................................................4549 Tilt Switch Circuit Check...........................................................................................4551 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Check.................................................4553 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check.....................................................4555 Detention Switch (P Range Switch) Circuit Check.....................................................................4557 Key Switch and Key Lock Solenoid Circuit Check (With Intelligent Key)...............................................4558 Key Switch Circuit Check (Without Intelligent Key)..................................................................4560 Seat Memory Switch Circuit Check....................................................................................4561 Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Check.................................................................................4563 Uart Communication Line Circuit Check...............................................................................4564 Lumber Support Circuit Check........................................................................................4565 POWER SEAT..............................................................................................................4567 Schematic...........................................................................................................4567 Wiring Diagram–SEAT– / For Driver Seat..............................................................................4568 Wiring Diagram–SEAT– / For Passenger Seat...........................................................................4570 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................4571 HEATED SEAT.............................................................................................................4572 Description.........................................................................................................4572 Wiring Diagram – HSEAT –............................................................................................4573 FRONT SEAT..............................................................................................................4575 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4575 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4577 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4578 REMOVAL OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD................................................................................4578 INSTALLATION OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD...........................................................................4579 REMOVAL OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD............................................................................4579 INSTALLATION OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD.......................................................................4580 REAR SEAT...............................................................................................................4581 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4581 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4583 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4583 REMOVAL OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD............................................................................4583 INSTALLATION OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD.......................................................................4584 REMOVAL OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD................................................................................4584 INSTALLATION OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD...........................................................................4584 REMOVAL OF REMOTE CONTROL LEVER.................................................................................4585 INSTALLATION OF REMOTE CONTROL LEVER............................................................................4585 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 82 srs.............................................................................................................................4586 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4586 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4588 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4588 Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service.................................................4588 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4589 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4589 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS).....................................................................................4590 SRS Configuration...................................................................................................4590 Front Seat Belt Pre-Tensioner with Load Limiter.....................................................................4591 Front Side Air Bag..................................................................................................4591 Side Curtain Air Bag................................................................................................4591 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.......................................................................................................4592 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction......................................................................................4592 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION..............................................................................................4592 HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR..................................................4592 Information from Customer...................................................................................4592 Preliminary Check...........................................................................................4592 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4593 Component Parts Location............................................................................................4594 Schematic...........................................................................................................4595 Wiring Diagram — SRS —..............................................................................................4596 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................4600 DIAGNOSIS MODE FOR CONSULT-II...................................................................................4600 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-II...............................................................4600 From User Mode to Diagnosis Mode............................................................................4600 From Diagnosis Mode to User Mode............................................................................4600 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS............................................................................4601 Self-Diagnosis Function (Without CONSULT-II)........................................................................4601 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITHOUT CONSULT-II............................................................4601 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS.............................................................................4601 SRS Operation Check.................................................................................................4602 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1..........................................................................................4602 Checking Air Bag Operation by Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp — User Mode......................................4602 Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II...................................................................................4604 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2..........................................................................................4604 CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart (“SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”)....................................................4605 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3..........................................................................................4608 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)..................................................4610 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5..........................................................................................4610 CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart (“SELF-DIAG [PAST]” or “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”)..............................4612 Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II................................................................................4614 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6..........................................................................................4614 Inspecting SRS Malfunctioning Parts by Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp — Diagnosis Mode........................4614 WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART...................................................................................4614 Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn OFF.........................................................4618 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7..........................................................................................4618 Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON..........................................................4619 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8..........................................................................................4619 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE...................................................................................................4620 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4620 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4620 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4621 SPIRAL CABLE............................................................................................................4622 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4622 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4622 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4623 FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE..........................................................................................4624 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4624 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4624 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4624 SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE.............................................................................................4625 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4625 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4625 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4626 CRASH ZONE SENSOR.......................................................................................................4627 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4627 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4627 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4627 SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR.........................................................................................4628 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4628 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4628 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4628 FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER...........................................................................................4629 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4629 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT...................................................................................................4630 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4630 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4630 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4630 ECU DISCRIMINATED NO............................................................................................4630 COLLISION DIAGNOSIS.....................................................................................................4631 For Frontal Collision...............................................................................................4631 SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)..........................................................................4631 For Side Collision..................................................................................................4633 WHEN THE SIDE AIR BAG IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION:.......................................................4633 WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION:................................................................4633 SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION).............................................................................4633 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 82 tf..............................................................................................................................4636 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4636 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4638 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4638 Precautions.........................................................................................................4638 Service Notice or Precautions.......................................................................................4639 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4640 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4640 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4642 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4643 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4643 TRANSFER FLUID..........................................................................................................4644 Replacement.........................................................................................................4644 DRAINING........................................................................................................4644 FILLING.........................................................................................................4644 Inspection..........................................................................................................4644 FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL...................................................................................4644 AWD SYSTEM..............................................................................................................4645 Power Transfer Diagram..............................................................................................4645 System Description..................................................................................................4645 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................4645 ELECTRIC CONTROLLED COUPLING....................................................................................4646 Operation Principle.........................................................................................4646 AWD CONTROL UNIT................................................................................................4646 AWD WARNING LAMP................................................................................................4647 AWD Warning Lamp Indication.................................................................................4647 System Diagram......................................................................................................4647 COMPONENTS FUNCTION DESCRIPTION.................................................................................4648 CAN Communication...................................................................................................4648 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..............................................................................................4648 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.......................................................................................................4649 Fail-Safe Function..................................................................................................4649 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis....................................................................................4649 BASIC CONCEPT...................................................................................................4649 Location of Electrical Parts........................................................................................4650 Circuit Diagram.....................................................................................................4651 Wiring Diagram — AWD —..............................................................................................4652 Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptoms................................................................................4655 AWD Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values...............................................................4655 AWD CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE...............................................................................4655 Specifications with CONSULT-II..............................................................................4655 CONSULT-II Function (ALL MODE AWD/4WD)..............................................................................4657 FUNCTION........................................................................................................4657 CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE....................................................................................4657 SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE...........................................................................................4657 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4657 Display Item List...........................................................................................4658 How to Erase Self-Diagnostic Results........................................................................4658 DATA MONITOR MODE...............................................................................................4659 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4659 Display Item List...........................................................................................4659 ACTIVE TEST MODE................................................................................................4660 Description.................................................................................................4660 Test Item...................................................................................................4660 AWD CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBER....................................................................................4660 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM............................................................................................4661 Power Supply Circuit for AWD Control Unit...........................................................................4661 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE.................................................................4661 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4661 AWD Control Unit....................................................................................................4662 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4662 ABS System..........................................................................................................4662 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4662 AWD Solenoid........................................................................................................4663 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE.................................................................4663 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4663 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................4665 AWD Actuator Relay..................................................................................................4666 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE.................................................................4666 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4666 Engine Control Signal...............................................................................................4667 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4667 CAN Communication Line..............................................................................................4667 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4667 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS..........................................................................................4668 AWD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON When The Ignition Switch Is Turned to ON..........................................4668 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4668 AWD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn OFF Several Seconds after Engine Started.............................................4668 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4668 Heavy Tight-Corner Braking Symptom Occurs When The Vehicle Is Driven and The Steering Wheel Is Tu...................4670 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4670 Vehicle Does Not Enter AWD Mode Even Though AWD Warning Lamp Turned to OFF..........................................4671 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4671 While Driving, AWD Warning Lamp Flashes Rapidly (When Flashing in Approx. 1 Minute and Then Turni...................4672 While Driving, AWD Warning Lamp Flashes Slowly (When Continuing to Flash until Turning Ignition S...................4672 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4672 AWD CONTROL UNIT........................................................................................................4674 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4674 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4674 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4674 FRONT OIL SEAL..........................................................................................................4675 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4675 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4675 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4675 REAR OIL SEAL...........................................................................................................4676 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4676 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4676 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4677 AIR BREATHER HOSE.......................................................................................................4678 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4678 TRANSFER ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................................4679 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4679 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4679 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4679 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4680 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................4680 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4681 Front Case and Rear Case....................................................................................4681 Mainshaft Assembly..........................................................................................4685 Front Drive Shaft and Drive Chain...........................................................................4685 INSPECTION......................................................................................................4686 Cases.......................................................................................................4686 Bearing.....................................................................................................4686 Shaft.......................................................................................................4686 Gears and Chain.............................................................................................4686 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4687 Front Drive Shaft and Drive Chain...........................................................................4687 Mainshaft Assembly..........................................................................................4688 Front Case and Rear Case....................................................................................4688 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4694 General Specifications..............................................................................................4694 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 82 wt..............................................................................................................................4696 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4696 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4697 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4697 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4697 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4698 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4698 ROAD WHEEL..............................................................................................................4699 Inspection..........................................................................................................4699 ALUMINUM WHEEL..................................................................................................4699 STEEL WHEEL.....................................................................................................4699 ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY................................................................................................4700 Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type)..............................................................................4700 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4700 WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................4700 Tire Rotation.......................................................................................................4701 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM........................................................................................4702 System Components...................................................................................................4702 System Description..................................................................................................4702 TRANSMITTER.....................................................................................................4702 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER...................................................................................4702 BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE).......................................................................................4703 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP..................................................................................4703 DISPLAY UNIT....................................................................................................4703 CAN COMMUNICATION.......................................................................................................4704 System Description..................................................................................................4704 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.......................................................................................................4705 Schematic...........................................................................................................4705 Wiring Diagram......................................................................................................4706 Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard...........................................................................4709 ID Registration Procedure...........................................................................................4711 ID REGISTRATION WITH ACTIVATION TOOL............................................................................4711 ID REGISTRATION WITHOUT ACTIVATION TOOL.........................................................................4712 Transmitter Wake Up Operation.......................................................................................4713 WITH ACTIVATION TOOL............................................................................................4713 Self-Diagnosis......................................................................................................4714 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................4714 FUNCTION........................................................................................................4714 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DIAGNOSTIC CHART.................................................................4714 CONSULT-II......................................................................................................4715 CONSULT-II Main Function....................................................................................4715 WORK SUPPORT MODE...............................................................................................4716 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4716 Test Item...................................................................................................4716 ID Read.....................................................................................................4716 ID Regist...................................................................................................4716 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE....................................................................................4716 DATA MONITOR MODE...............................................................................................4717 ACTIVE TEST MODE................................................................................................4717 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4717 Test Item...................................................................................................4717 Flasher.....................................................................................................4718 Horn........................................................................................................4718 Warning Lamp................................................................................................4718 ID Regist Warning...........................................................................................4718 Flat Tire Warning...........................................................................................4719 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair......................................................4720 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................4720 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4720 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4721 Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart......................................................................................4722 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS.............................................................................4723 Inspection 1: Transmitter or Control Unit (BCM).....................................................................4723 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 21, 22, 23 OR 24...........................................................................4723 Inspection 2: Transmitter - 1.......................................................................................4723 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 31, 32, 33, 34, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47 OR 48...........................................4723 Inspection 3: Transmitter - 2.......................................................................................4724 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 35, 36, 37 OR 38...........................................................................4724 Inspection 4: Vehicle Speed Signal..................................................................................4725 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 52.........................................................................................4725 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS..........................................................................................4726 Inspection 1: Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On.......................................4726 Inspection 2: Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On...............................................4726 Inspection 3: Warning Lamp Blinks When Ignition Switch Is Turned On.................................................4728 Inspection 4: Turn Signal Lamp Blinks When Ignition Switch Is Turned On.............................................4729 Inspection 5: ID Registration Can Not Be Completed..................................................................4729 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION................................................................................................4730 Transmitter.........................................................................................................4730 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4730 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4730 SERVICE DATA............................................................................................................4732 Road Wheel..........................................................................................................4732 Tire................................................................................................................4732 Tightening Torque...................................................................................................4732 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 82 ww..............................................................................................................................4734 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4734 PRECAUTION..............................................................................................................4736 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4736 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM...........................................................................................4737 Components Parts and Harness Connector Location.....................................................................4737 System Description..................................................................................................4737 OUT LINE........................................................................................................4737 LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION.......................................................................................4738 HI SPEED WIPER OPERATION........................................................................................4738 INTERMITTENT OPERATION..........................................................................................4738 Wiper Dial Position Setting.................................................................................4739 AUTO STOP OPERATION.............................................................................................4739 WASHER OPERATION................................................................................................4739 MIST OPERATION..................................................................................................4740 FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION..............................................................................................4740 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................4740 Description.................................................................................................4740 Operation Description.......................................................................................4740 BCM - Operation Table of Combination Switches...............................................................4741 Sample Operation: (When Wiper Switch Turned to LOW Position)................................................4741 Operation Mode..............................................................................................4742 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4742 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4742 Schematic...........................................................................................................4743 Wiring Diagram — WIPER —............................................................................................4744 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................4747 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................4747 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4748 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4748 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................4748 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................4750 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................4750 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................4751 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4751 Display Item List...........................................................................................4751 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4751 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4751 Display Item List...........................................................................................4751 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4752 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4752 Display Item List...........................................................................................4752 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................4753 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................4753 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4754 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4754 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu..............................................................4754 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4754 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4754 Front Wiper Does Not Operate........................................................................................4755 Front Wiper Does Not Return to Stop Position........................................................................4757 Only Front Wiper Low Does Not Operate...............................................................................4758 Only Front Wiper Hi Does Not Operate................................................................................4760 Only Front Wiper Intermittent Does Not Operate......................................................................4761 Front Wiper Interval Time Is Not Controlled by Vehicle Speed........................................................4761 Front Wiper Intermittent Operation Switch Position Cannot Be Adjusted...............................................4762 Wiper Does Not Wipe When Front Washer Operates......................................................................4762 After Front Wiper Operate for 10 Seconds, They Stop for 20 Seconds, and After Repeating the Opera...................4763 Front Wiper Does Not Stop...........................................................................................4764 Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location................................4765 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4765 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4765 ADJUSTMENT......................................................................................................4765 Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Motor and Linkage...........................................................4765 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4765 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4765 Disassembly and Assembly of Front Wiper Motor and Linkage...........................................................4766 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4766 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4766 Washer Nozzle Adjustment............................................................................................4766 Washer Tube Layout..................................................................................................4768 Removal and Installation of Front Washer Nozzle.....................................................................4768 Removal and Installation of Front Washer Tube Joint.................................................................4768 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4768 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4768 Inspection of Washer Nozzle.........................................................................................4768 CHECK VALVE.....................................................................................................4768 Removal and Installation of Front Wiper and Washer Switch...........................................................4769 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4769 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4769 Removal and Installation of Washer Tank.............................................................................4769 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4769 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4770 Removal and Installation of Washer Motor............................................................................4770 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4770 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4770 REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM............................................................................................4771 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................4771 System Description..................................................................................................4771 REAR WIPER OPERATION............................................................................................4771 INTERMITTENT OPERATION..........................................................................................4772 AUTO STOP OPERATION.............................................................................................4772 WASHER OPERATION................................................................................................4772 BCM WIPER SWITCH READING FUNCTION...............................................................................4772 Wiring Diagram — WIP/ R —...........................................................................................4773 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................4775 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4776 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4776 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................4776 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................4778 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................4778 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4779 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4779 Display Item List...........................................................................................4779 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4779 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4779 Display Item List...........................................................................................4779 Rear Wiper Does Not Operate.........................................................................................4780 Rear Wiper Does Not Return to Stop Position.........................................................................4781 Only Rear Wiper ON Does Not Operate.................................................................................4782 Only Rear Wiper INT Does Not Operate................................................................................4782 Wiper Does Not Wipe When Rear Washer Operates.......................................................................4782 Rear Wipers Do Not Stop.............................................................................................4783 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arm, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location..................................4784 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4784 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4784 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Motor........................................................................4784 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4785 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4785 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Blade........................................................................4785 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4785 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4785 Washer Nozzle Adjustment............................................................................................4786 Removal and Installation of Washer Nozzle...........................................................................4786 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4786 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4786 Washer Tube Layout..................................................................................................4787 Check Valve.........................................................................................................4787 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper and Washer Switch............................................................4787 Removal and Installation of Washer Tank.............................................................................4787 Removal and Installation of Washer Motor............................................................................4787 CIGARETTE LIGHTER.......................................................................................................4788 Wiring Diagram — CIGAR —............................................................................................4788 Removal and Installation of Cigarette Lighter.......................................................................4789 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4789 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4789 POWER SOCKET............................................................................................................4790 Wiring Diagram — P/SCKT —...........................................................................................4790 Removal and Installation of Center Console Box Rear Side Power Socket...............................................4791 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4791 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4791 Removal and Installation of Center Console Box Power Socket.........................................................4791 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4791 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4791 Removal and Installation of Luggage Room Power Socket...............................................................4791 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4791 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4791 HORN....................................................................................................................4792 Wiring Diagram — HORN —.............................................................................................4792 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4793 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4793 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4793 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 75 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 77 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 81 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 82
Customer Support: [email protected]
https://vimeo.com/873228726?share=copy
PLEASE NOTE:
- This is the same manual used by the DEALERSHIPS to SERVICE your vehicle.
- The manual can be all yours – Once payment is complete, you will be taken to the download page from where you can download the manual. All in 2-5 minutes time!!
- Need any other service / repair / parts manual, please feel free to contact us at heydownloadss @gmail.com . We may surprise you with a nice offer
S.V
